258
8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90 http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 1/258 The Ultimate Driving Machine Owner's Handbook for Vehicle Contents A-Z Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

BMW Manual for E90

  • Upload
    danizan

  • View
    381

  • Download
    23

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 1/258

The UltimateDriving Machine

Owner's Handbook for Vehicle Contents

A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 2: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 2/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 3: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 3/258

318i320i325i

325xi330i

330xi335i

335xi

318d320d325d330d

330xd335d

Owner's Handbook for Vehicle

Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.

The better you are acquainted with your car, the easier you will

find driving it to be. We would therefore like to offer you the fol-

lowing advice:

Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your

new BMW. It contains important notes on how to operate the car,

enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technicaladvantages of your BMW. It also contains useful information

which will help you to uphold both the car's operating safety and

its full resale value.

Supplementary information is provided in the other documents

of on-board literature.

We wish you many a safe and enjoyable journey,

BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 4: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 4/258

© 2007 Bayerische Motoren WerkeAktiengesellschaftMunich, GermanyNot to be reproduced, wholly or in part, withoutwritten permission from BMW AG, Munich.Order No. 01 41 0 013 270English II/07, 07 03 500Printed in GermanyPrinted on environmentally friendly paper,bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 5: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 5/258

Contents

The quickest access to a particular topic or item

is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index,

see page 236.

About this Owner's Handbook 

4 Notes

Overview

8 Cockpit

14 iDrive

21 Voice input system

Controls

26 Opening and closing

41 Adjusting

50 Child safety55 Driving

70 Everything under control

84 Technical features for driving comfort and

safety

92 Lights

98 Climate

105 Practical interior equipment

Driving hints

120 Driving precautions

Navigation

130 Starting the navigation system

132 Destination input

147 Route guidance

158 What to do if ...

Entertainment

162 On/off and settings

166 Radio

171 Digital radio DAB

176 CD player and CD changer

183 AUX-IN port

184 USB/audio interface

187 TV

Mobility

192 Refuelling

195 Wheels and tyres

198 In the engine compartment

203 Maintenance205 Replacing parts

213 Mutual aid

Reference220 Technical data

231 Short commands for the voice input

system

236 From A to Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 6: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 6/258

  N  o  t  e  s

4

Notes

About this Owner'sHandbook 

We have tried to make all the information in this

Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest

access to a specific topic or item is by consult-

ing the detailed alphabetical index at the end.

Consult the first chapter for an initial overview of

your car.

When the time comes to sell your BMW, please

remember to hand over this Owner's Hand-

book; it is an important part of the vehicle.

Additional sources of information

If you have any queries, BMW Service will be

glad to advise you.

Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,

can also be found on the Internet on

www.bmw.com.

Symbols used

Indicates precautions that must be fol-

lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to

the vehicle.<

Indicates information that will assist you

in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively

for your vehicle.<

Refers to measures that can be taken to

help protect the environment.<

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-

tion.

* Identifies optional extras or specific national-market items of equipment, as well as equip-

ment and functions not yet available at the time

of printing.

"..." Identifies texts on the control display for

selecting functions.

{...} Identifies commands for the voice input

system.

{{...}} Identifies replies by the voice input sys-

tem.

Symbol for components andassemblies

Recommends that you study the relevant

section of this Owner's Handbook in con-

nection with a particular part or assembly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 7: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 7/258

 5

Your individual vehicle

When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-

ous items of equipment. This Owner's Hand-

book describes all models and equipment

specifications which BMW offers within this

particular model line.

This explains why the Owner's Handbook may

also contain details of items which you have notordered. The differences can easily be identi-

fied by the asterisk * shown against optional

extras.

Should your BMW feature equipment which is

not described in this Owner's Handbook,

please refer to the Supplementary Owner's

Handbooks supplied with your vehicle.

In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the

controls are arranged differently from

those shown in the illustrations of this Owner'sHandbook.<

Status at time of printing

The high safety and quality standards of BMW

vehicles are maintained by unceasing develop-

ment work on designs, equipment and acces-

sories. In rare instances, your car may therefore

differ from the information supplied in the

Owner's Handbook.

For your own safety

Maintenance and repair

The advanced technology behind this car,

for example the use of modern materials

and high-performance electronics, means that

specially adapted methods of maintenance and

repair are required. Always have the necessary

work on your BMW performed either by BMW

Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW

specifications and has suitably trained person-

nel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could

result in consequential damage and thus con-

stitute a safety risk.<

Parts and accessories

BMW recommends using parts and

accessory products on this vehicle that

are specifically approved for this purpose byBMW.

You are recommended to consult BMW Service

for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accesso-

ries, other BMW-approved products and com-

petent advice on all related matters.

The safety and compatibility of these parts and

products in conjunction with BMW vehicles

have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts

product liability for them.

BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces-

sory products of any kind which it has not

approved.

BMW is unable to assess each individual prod-

uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use

on BMW vehicles without safety risk. This suit-

ability cannot be guaranteed even if an official

permit has been issued for the particular prod-

uct in a specific country. Tests performed for

such permits cannot always cover all operating

conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them

therefore are insufficient.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 8: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 8/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 9: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 9/258

OverviewThis summary of buttons, switches an

displays serves as an initial guid

In addition, it gives you an insig

into the principles behind the various wa

in which functions can be performe

Overview

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 10: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 10/258

  C  o  c  k  p  i  t

8

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

3 Folding outside mirrors in and out* 47

4 Adjusting outside mirrors, parking position

function* 47

1 Safety switch for electric rear

windows 37 

2Opening and closing windows 36 

5 Headlight beam throw

adjustment* 94

6Side lights 92

Low-beam headlights 92

Automatic driving lights

control* 92

Adaptive Head Light* 94

High-Beam Assistant* 95

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 11: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 11/258

 9

9 Instrument cluster 10

12 Ignition lock 55

13 Buttons* on steering wheel

14 Horn, entire surface

15 Adjusting steering wheel 48

17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 198

7Fog lights* 96

Rear fog lights* 96

8Flashing turn indicators 60

High-beam headlights/headlight

flasher 94

High-Beam Assistant* 95

Parking lights* 94

Computer 72

Settings and information about the

vehicle 74

Instrument lighting 96

10Windscreen wipers 60

Rain sensor* 61

Touring:

Rear window wiper 61

11 Switching the ignition on/off and

starting/stopping the engine 55

Telephone*:

> Press: accept and end a call,

start dialling* for selected

phone numbers. Redial if no

phone number has been

selected

> Press for longer: redial

Volume control

Activating/deactivating voice input

system* 21

Changing radio station

Selecting music track

Changing television channel

Scrolling through phone book andthrough lists with stored phone

numbers

Individually programmable 48 

Individually programmable 48 

16 Cruise control*for 4-cylinder engines 62

for 6-cylinder engines 63

Active Cruise Control* 65

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 12: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 12/258

  C  o  c  k  p  i  t

10

Instrument cluster

1 Speedometer

2 Flashing turn indicators

3 Indicator and warning lights 11

4 Displays for Active Cruise Control* 65

5 Revolution counter 70

6 Energy Control* 71

Engine oil temperature* 71

7 Display for

> Clock 70

> Outside temperature 70

> Indicator and warning lights 80

8 Display for

> Position of automatic gearbox* 57

> Computer 72

> Date of next scheduled service, and

remaining driving distance 75

> Distance recorder – odometer – and trip

distance recorder 70

> High-Beam Assistant* 95

> Checking engine oil level* 199

> Settings and information 74

>  There is a Check Control

message 80

9 Fuel gauge 71

10 Resetting trip distance recorder 70

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 13: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 13/258

 11

Indicator and warning lights

The principle

Indicator and warning lights can come on in var-

ious combinations and colours in panel 1 or 2.

Some lights are checked for proper functioning

and thus come on briefly when the engine starts

or the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom of the control dis-

play explain the meaning of the indicator and

warning lights being shown.

You can call up additional information, e.g.

about the possible cause of a fault and about

what corresponding measures should be taken,

via Check Control, see page 80.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown

as soon as the corresponding light comes on.

Indicator lights without text messages

The following indicator lights in panel 1 confirm

that certain functions are active:

High-beam headlights/

headlight flasher 94

Fog lights* 96

Rear fog lights* 96

Light flashes:

DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-

sive forces in order to maintain driving

stability 87

Handbrake applied 57

Engine fault with adverse effect on

exhaust emissions 204

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 14: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 14/258

  C  o  c  k  p  i  t

12

Around the centre console: controls and displays

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 15: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 15/258

 13

1 Microphone for voice input system* and

hands-free mode for telephone*

2 SOS: initiating an emergency call* 213

3 Reading lights 97

4 Glass roof/panorama glass roof * 37

5 Interior lights 97

6 Indicator light* front passenger airbags 51

7 Control display 14

8 Hazard warning flashers

9 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 86

10 Central locking system 30

11 Automatic air-conditioning system

12 Ejecting

> Audio CD 162

> Navigation DVD with Business naviga-

tion system* 130

13 Changing

> Radio stations 166

> Tracks 177

14 Ejecting navigation DVD from Professional

navigation system* 130

16 Controller 14

Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-

tally in four directions17 Calling up start menu on control display 15

18 Drive for navigation DVD for Professional

navigation system* 130

19 Favourites buttons/programmable memory

keys 19

20 Switching entertainment audio output on/

off and adjusting volume 163

21 Drive for

> Audio CD 162> Navigation DVD with Business naviga-

tion system* 130

Air distribution to the

windscreen 99

Air distribution to the upper body

area 99

Air distribution to the footwell 99

Automatic air distribution and flow

rate control 100

Cooling function 101

Automatic Air Recirculation Control

AUC 100

Recirculated-air mode 100

Maximum cooling 100

Residual heat utilisation 101

Air flow rate 100

Defrosting windows 101

Rear window heating 101

15Seat heating* 45

Park Distance Control PDC* 84

Saloon:

Roller sunblind* 108

Hill Descent Control HDC* 87

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 16: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 16/258

  i  D  r  i  v  e

14

iDrive

iDrive integrates the functions of a large

number of switches. These functions thus can

be controlled from one central point. The basic

menu-guided operating principle is explained

below. Details of how to control individual func-

tions are provided under the descriptions of the

items of equipment concerned.

Controls

1 Control display

2  button

Calling up the start menu

3 Controller

The controller is used to select menu items

and adjust settings:

> Move in four directions, arrow 4

> Turn, arrow 5

> Press, arrow 6

Only make adjustments if the traffic con-

ditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as

not to endanger the car's occupants and other

road users by being distracted.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 17: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 17/258

 15

Menu summary

Communication

> Telephone*, see separate Operating

Instructions

> BMW Assist*, BMW Online* or TeleServ-

ice*, see separate Operating Instructions

Navigation or on-board info

> Navigation system

> On-board information, e.g. to display the

average fuel consumption

Entertainment

> Radio

> CD player and CD changer*

> AUX-IN port, USB/audio interface* for

external audio device

> TV*

Climate

> Air distribution

> Automatic program

> Independent mode*

 menu

> Switching off the control display

> Tone and display settings

> Settings for traffic information

> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central

locking system

> Display of service requirements and dead-

lines for statutory inspections

> Settings for telephone

Operating principle

Start menu

All iDrive functions can be called up via five

menu items.

Calling up the start menu

Press the button.

To call up the start menu from the menu:Press the button twice.

Calling up menu items in the start menu

As of radio readiness, see page 55:

Using the start menu, you can call up the four

menu items of Communication, Navigation,

Entertainment and Climate by moving the con-

troller to the left, right, forwards or backwards.

You can call up the menu by pressing the con-

troller.

Convenient call-up of menu items

With convenient call-up, you can:

> Call up a menu item from the start menu in

the view last displayed

> Switch directly between Communication,

Navigation, Entertainment and Climate

without pressing the button

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 18: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 18/258

  i  D  r  i  v  e

16

To do so, move the controller in the relevant

direction and hold it in position for more than

about 2 seconds.

Displays in the menu

1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The

currently active field appears highlighted in

the display.

2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last

selected.

1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-

tal or vertical lists.

2 Arrows indicate that there are additional list

items which are not currently visible.

3 Settings are represented graphically or as

numerical values.

Communication

Navigation or on-board info

Entertainment

Climate

 menu

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 19: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 19/258

 17

Operating principle at a glance

This illustration shows how the vehicle can be

operated via iDrive.

The individual steps are explained under Set-

ting the clock, see page 78.

1 Select a menu item:

> Turn the controller; the highlight marker

moves

> Menu items in white can be selected by

highlighting them

2 To activate a menu item:

> Press the controller.

> New menu items are displayed or the

function is executed

3 Select a menu item: see 1

4 To switch between fields:

> Slightly move the controller to the left,

right, forwards or backwards

> Release the controller

> The active field becomes brighter in col-

our

5 To adjust settings:

> Turn the controller

> Graphic display, numerical value or text

displays can be changed

> Confirm by changing the field

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 20: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 20/258

  i  D  r  i  v  e

18

Status information

1 Display for:

> Entertainment:

Radio, CD, TV* and external audio

source*

> Telephone*:

Name of network operator, no network,

or name of mobile phone registered with

the car

> "Car Phone"*:

Active voice connection for emergency

calls if BMW Assist is not enabled

> "BMW Assist"*:

Active voice connection with a

BMW Assist service

> "Online" or "GPRS Online"*:

Active connection with BMW Online*

2  Entertainment audio output off or dis-play for traffic reports*:

> "TP":

Traffic Programme is on

> "T":

Traffic Programme is off but traffic

reports can be received

> No display:

No traffic reports can be received

3 Display for traffic information*:

> "TMC":

Reception of traffic information for the

navigation system is possible and

switched on

> "TI+":

Reception of traffic information from V-

Info Plus is possible and switched on

4 Display for:

>  New entries pending in "Calls not

accepted" *

>  Roaming active

5  It is possible to use the telephone* if the

mobile phone is registered with the car

 Mobile phone network reception

strength; display depends on the mobilephone

6 Time

Other displays:

Status information is temporarily hidden during

Check Control message displays or inputs via

the voice input system.

Assistance window*

Additional information can be displayed in the

assistance window:

> The computer or journey computer*

> The arrow view or map view in vehicles with

navigation system*

> The current position*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 21: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 21/258

 19

Selecting display

1. Move the controller to the right to switch to

the assistance window, and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the menu item.

3. Press the controller.

Switching assistance window on/off 

1. Move the controller to the right to switch tothe assistance window, and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Exit assist. window" and press the

controller.

To turn back on, switch to the assistance win-

dow and press the controller.

Switching control display off/

on1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control-

ler.

Press the controller to switch on.

Favourites buttons/programmable memory keys

You can store certain functions of iDrive on the

favourites buttons/programmable memory keysand run them accordingly:

> Destinations in navigation*

> Entertainment:

> Radio stations

> CD

> CD compartment of the CD changer

> TV

> AUX

> Telephone: phone numbers

The assignment of the favourites buttons/pro-

grammable memory keys is stored for the

remote control currently in use.

Storing a function

Destinations in navigation*

1. Select a navigation destination, e.g. in the

destination list or in the address book.2. Press the ... button for longer

than 2 seconds.

Special features of the Professional navigation

system:

> If the route guidance has been started and

map view is active, the current destination is

stored.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 22: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 22/258

  i  D  r  i  v  e

20

> In the case of destination input via map, the

coordinates in the cross-hairs are stored,

rather than the current destination.

Telephone, phone numbers

1. Enter the phone number or select it from a

list of stored phone numbers, e.g. the A-Z

list.

2. Press the ... button for longer

than 2 seconds.

If a name has been assigned to the phone

number, the name is also stored.

Entertainment

Independent of the selection on the control dis-

play, what is currently being heard is stored in

the Entertainment menu, e.g. a radio station.

1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-

tion or CD.

2. Press the ... button for longer

than 2 seconds.

On vehicles equipped with two drives, the

current track of a CD with compressed

audio files is stored.<

Running a function

Press the ... button.

The function is run immediately. This means,for example, that if a phone number is selected

the connection is established or if a navigation

destination is called up the route guidance is

started.

Displaying the assignment of thebuttons

You can display the assignment of the buttons

by touching them with your finger. Please do

not wear gloves when doing so. Touching withan object, e.g. a pen, does not work.

Displaying brief info

Touch the ... button.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed.

 Navigation destination

 Entertainment source

 Telephone, phone number

 Not assigned

Displaying detailed information

Touch the ... button for a longer

period.

Deleting the assignment of the buttons

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Favourite keys" and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Delete assignment of all Favourite

keys" and press the controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 23: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 23/258

 21

Voice input system

The principle

The voice input system enables you to operate

various items of equipment on your car without

having to take your hands off the steering

wheel.

Individual menu items on the control display

can be called up by means of spoken com-

mands. It is not necessary to use the controller.

The voice input system translates your com-

mands into control signals for the system in

question, and assists you by means of

announcements or questions.

The voice input system includes a special

microphone positioned near the interior mirror,

see page 12.

Condition

Via iDrive, select the language in which the

voice input system is operating, so that the spo-

ken commands can be identified. Selecting the

language for iDrive, see page 83.

Symbols in the Owner's Handbook 

Speaking commands

Activating voice input

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

 This symbol on the control display and an

acoustic signal indicate that the voice input

system is ready to receive spoken com-

mands.

2. Say the command.

The command appears on the control dis-play.

 This symbol appears on the control display if

further commands can be given.

If no further commands are possible, continue

by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.

Ending or interrupting voice input

Press the button on the steering wheel

or

Commands

Having possible commands read aloud

You can prompt the system to read out the

commands that are possible, depending on

which menu item is selected on the control dis-

play.

*

{...} Enunciate commands shown in thisform precisely as given.

{{...}} Identifies the replies by the voice

input system.

{Cancel}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 24: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 24/258

Page 25: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 25/258

 23

5. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Notes

More information about voice control of

the telephone appears in the separate

Operating Instructions.<

When speaking commands, note the following:

> Say the commands and numbers fluently

and at normal volume; avoid unnatural

emphases and pauses. This also applies to

spelling a destination entry.

> Always speak the commands in the lan-

guage of the voice input system.

> When selecting a radio station, use thestandard pronunciation of the station name.

> When making entries in the voice-activated

phone book, use only names in the lan-

guage of the voice input system, and do not

use abbreviations.

> Keep doors, windows and the glass roof/

panorama glass roof closed to avoid noise

interference from outside the car.

> Avoid background noises in the car while

you are speaking.

6. Select a track, e.g.:

{Track 1}

The system says:

{{Track 1}}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 26: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 26/258

Page 27: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 27/258

ControlThis chapter enables you to operate your c

with greater ease. All equipment items that a

of relevance for driving and make your journ

safer and more comfortable are described he

Control

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 28: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 28/258

Page 29: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 29/258

 27

> Triple turn signal, see page 60

> 12h/24h mode of the clock, see page 79

> Date format, see page 80

> Brightness of the control display, see

page 83

> Language on the control display, see

page 83

> Units of measure for fuel consumption, dis-tance covered/remaining range, and tem-

perature, see page 75

> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-

trol PDC*, see page 85

> Welcome lights, see page 92

> Headlight courtesy delay feature, see

page 93

> Daytime driving lights, see page 93

> High-Beam Assistant, see page 95> Automatic air-conditioning system: AUTO

program, activating/deactivating cooling

function and Automatic Air Recirculation

Control, setting temperature, air flow rate

and distribution, see page 99 ff 

> Audio volume, see page 163

> Tone settings, see page 163

> Speed-dependent volume control, see

page 164

Central locking system

The principle

The central locking becomes active when the

driver's door is closed.

The following are unlocked or locked in combi-

nation:

> Doors> Luggage compartment lid/tailgate

> Fuel filler flap

Operating from outside

> Via the remote control

> Via the door lock

> With convenient access* by means of the

handles on the driver's and the front pas-

senger's door

The deadlocks are operated at the same time.

The latter prevent the doors from being

unlocked either at the safety lock buttons or

door handles. In addition, if the remote control

is used, the interior lights and the doors' ground

lights* are switched on or off. The alarm sys-tem* is also armed or disarmed.

For further details of the alarm system, see

page 33.

Operating from inside

By means of the button for central locking, see

page 30.

In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the

central locking system unlocks automatically. In

addition, the hazard warning flashers and theinterior lights are switched on.

Opening and closing:With the remote control

Persons remaining in the car or pets left

inside can lock the doors from the inside.

You should therefore take the remote control

with you when you get out of the vehicle so that

the latter can be opened from the outside.<

Unlocking

Press the button.

The interior lights, the ground lights* and the

welcome lights come on.

You can also set the way in which the car is

unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote

control currently in use.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 30: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 30/258

  O  p  e  n  i  n  g  a  n  d  c  l  o  s  i  n  g

28

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Door locks" is selected and press the

controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

troller.

7. Select "Lock button" and press the control-

ler.

8. Select a menu item:> "All doors"

Press the button once to unlock the

entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only"

Press the button once to unlock only

the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.

Press it twice to unlock the entire vehi-

cle.

9. Press the controller.

Convenient opening

Hold the button pressed.

The windows and the glass roof */panorama

glass roof * are opened.

Locking

Press the button.

Do not lock the car from the outside when

there is someone inside it, as it cannot

then be unlocked from the inside in some

national-market versions.<

Convenient closing

Hold the button pressed.

The windows and the glass roof */panorama

glass roof * are closed.

Watch the closing movement to ensure

that no one is trapped. The closing proce-

dure is interrupted if the button is released.<

Switching on the interior lights

While the car is locked:

Press the button.

This function also enables you to locate the car,

for instance in a parking garage.

Saloon:Unlocking the luggage compartmentlid

Press the button for longer.

The luggage compartment lid opens a short

distance, regardless of whether it was locked or

unlocked.

On certain national-market versions, the

luggage compartment lid cannot be

opened unless the car has been unlocked.In order to avoid damage, make sure there is

sufficient clearance before opening the luggage

compartment lid. If the luggage compartment

lid had been locked before it was opened, it is

locked again as soon as it is closed.

Before and after each trip, check that the lug-

gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-

ently unlocked.<

Touring:Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button for longer.

The tailgate opens a short distance, regardless

of whether it was locked or unlocked.

On certain national-market versions, the

tailgate cannot be opened unless the car

has been unlocked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 31: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 31/258

 29

If the tailgate had been locked before it was

opened, it is locked again as soon as it is closed.

Before and after each trip, check that the tail-

gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<

If you press the button on the remote

control for longer a second time within

three seconds, the roller-blind cover is raised*.

Before closing the tailgate, press the roller blind

down until it snaps into place.<

Setting confirmation signals

You can choose to have visual confirmation that

the car has been unlocked or locked.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Door locks" is selected and press the

controller.

6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-

troller.

7. Select the desired signal.

8. Press controller.

 The signal is switched on.

Malfunctions

The remote control may malfunction as a result

of interference from local radio signals. If this

occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock

with the integrated key.

If the car can no longer be locked with a remote

control, the battery in the remote control is flat.

Use this remote control for a longer journey so

that the battery is recharged, see page 26. The

remote control for convenient access* contains

a battery that might have to be replaced, see

page 36.

Opening and closing:Via the door lock 

You can set the way in which the car isunlocked, see page 27.

Do not lock the car from the outside when

there is someone inside it, as it cannot

then be unlocked from the inside in some

national-market versions.<

In some national-market versions, the

alarm system* is triggered when the car

is unlocked via the door lock.

To switch off the alarm:

Unlock the car with the remote control, seepage 27, or insert the remote control fully into

the ignition lock.<

For further details of the alarm system, see

page 33.

Convenient operation

At the door lock, you can operate the windows

and the glass roof */panorama glass roof *.

Hold the key in the position for unlocking or

locking.

Watch the closing movement to ensure

that no one is trapped. The movement is

stopped when the key is released.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 32: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 32/258

Page 33: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 33/258

 31

Luggage compartment lid/tailgate

In order to avoid damage, make sure there

is sufficient clearance before opening the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate.<

Opening from outside

Saloon

Press the button, see arrow, or press the

button on the remote control for a longer

period of time. The luggage compartment lid

will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

On certain national-market versions, the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot

be opened with the remote control unless the

car has been unlocked.<

Touring

Press the button, see arrow, or press thebutton on the remote control for a longer

period of time. The tailgate will open slightly. It

can now be swung upwards.

On certain national-market versions, the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot

be opened with the remote control unless the

car has been unlocked.<

Press the button, see arrow, or press the

button on the remote control a second time for

an extended period within three seconds: the

roller-blind cover is raised.

Before closing the tailgate, press the cover

downward until it snaps into place.

Opening manually

Saloon

The integrated key of the remote control, see

page 26, fits the luggage compartment lid lock.

Turn the key to the left as far as it will go: the

luggage compartment lid will open.

If you unlock and open the luggage com-

partment lid with the key while the alarm

system is armed, the alarm will be triggered.

Switching off an alarm, see page 33.<

Touring

In the event of an electrical fault:

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 34: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 34/258

  O  p  e  n  i  n  g  a  n  d  c  l  o  s  i  n  g

32

1. From the luggage area, swing the cover on

the tailgate upwards.

2. Pull the ring upwards. The tailgate is

unlocked.

3. Open the tailgate and close the cover again.

The tailgate is locked as soon as it is pressed to

a close.

Emergency release*

Pull the lever in the luggage area. This will

unlock the luggage compartment lid.

Closing

The recessed handles in the interior trim of the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate make it easier

to pull the luggage compartment lid/tailgate

down.

To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing

area of the luggage compartment lid/tail-

gate is unobstructed.<

Saloon

Touring

Touring: opening and closing the rearwindow

Small items can be loaded and unloaded

quickly when the rear window is opened sepa-rately.

The roller-blind cover is raised when the

rear window is opened. Before closing the

rear window, press the roller-blind down until it

snaps into place.<

Press the button: the rear window opens

slightly. It can now be swung upwards.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 35: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 35/258

Page 36: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 36/258

  O  p  e  n  i  n  g  a  n  d  c  l  o  s  i  n  g

34

Tilt alarm sensor

The vehicle's inclination is monitored. The

alarm is triggered, for instance, if an attempt is

made to steal the car's wheels or tow it away.

Interior movement detector

Before the interior movement detector can

operate correctly, the windows and glass roof * 

must be closed.

Avoiding false alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement

detector can be switched off together. This pre-

vents false alarms, e.g. in the following situa-

tions:

> In duplex garages

> When being transported on car-carrying

trains, boats/ships or trailers

> If pets are to remain inside the car

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor andinterior movement detector

Press the button on the remote control

again as soon as the car is locked.

The indicator light comes on for approx. two

seconds, then begins to flash steadily. The tilt

alarm sensor and interior movement detector

are switched off until the car is next unlockedand locked.

Convenient access*

Convenient access enables you to access your

car without having to take the remote control

into your hand. It is sufficient to have the remote

control on your person, for example in a jacket

pocket. The vehicle automatically recognises

your remote control when it is in the immediatevicinity or inside the car.

Convenient access supports the following

functions:

> Unlocking/locking the car

> Unlocking just the luggage compartment

lid/tailgate

> Starting the engine

> Convenient closing

Operating requirements

> The car or the luggage compartment lid/tail-

gate can be locked only when the car ascer-

tains that the remote control on your person

is not inside the car.

> About two seconds have to elapse before

the car can again be unlocked and locked.

> The engine can be started only when the

car ascertains that the remote control on

your person is inside the car.

Comparison with the conventionalremote control

Generally speaking, it makes no difference

whether you control the functions outlined

above by using convenient access or by press-

ing the buttons on the remote control. Conse-quently, you should begin by familiarising your-

self with the instructions for opening and

closing, starting on page 26.

The features specific to convenient access are

described below.

A short delay when opening or closing the

windows or the glass roof/panorama

glass roof indicates that a test is being carried

out to ascertain whether there is a remote con-

trol inside the car. If necessary, please repeatthe opening or closing operation.<

Unlocking

Put your hand right round the handle of the

driver's or the front passenger's door, arrow 1.

This corresponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control is detected inside the pas-

senger compartment after the car has been

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 37: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 37/258

 35

unlocked, the electric steering wheel lock dis-

engages, see page 55.

Locking

Use your finger to touch the panel, arrow 2, for

approx. one second. This corresponds to

pressing the button.

Please make sure that the ignition and all

electrical consumers are switched off

prior to locking in order to preserve the bat-

tery.<

Convenient closing

For convenient closing, keep your finger on the

panel, arrow 2.

As of radio readiness, you can open and close

the windows, and also the retractable hardtop if

the car is stationary, as long as a remote control

is located inside the car.

Unlocking just the luggagecompartment lid/tailgate

Press the button on the outside of the luggage

compartment lid/tailgate. This corresponds to

pressing the button.

If a remote control inadvertently left

behind is detected inside the locked vehi-

cle's luggage area after you close the luggage

compartment lid/tailgate or rear window, the lidreopens slightly. The hazard warning flashers

flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness

Lightly touching the start/stop button switches

on radio readiness, see page 55.

Do not depress the brake or clutch, other-

wise the engine will start.<

Starting the engineYou can start the engine or switch on the igni-

tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.

It is not necessary to insert the remote control in

the ignition lock, see page 55.

Switching off the engine in vehicleswith automatic gearbox

The engine can be switched off only when the

selector lever is in position P, see page 57.

To switch off the engine with the selector lever

in position N, the remote control must be in the

ignition lock.

Before driving a vehicle with automaticgearbox into a car wash

1. Insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

2. Depress the brake.

3. Move the selector lever to position N.

4. Switch the engine off.

The car will be able to roll.

Malfunction

Convenient access may malfunction as a resultof interference from local radio signals. In this

case, open or close the vehicle using the but-

tons on the remote control or with the inte-

grated key. You can subsequently start the

engine by inserting the remote control into the

ignition lock.

Warning lights

If the warning light in the instrument

cluster comes on when you attemptto start the engine: the engine cannot

be started. The remote control is not in the car

or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control

with you into the car or have it checked. If appli-

cable, try inserting a different remote control

into the ignition lock.

If the warning light in the instrument

cluster comes on while the engine is

running: the remote control is no

longer inside the car. After the engine is then

switched off, it can be restarted only within

approx. 10 seconds.

If the indicator light in the instrument

cluster comes on and a message

appears on the control display:

change the battery in the remote control.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 38: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 38/258

Page 39: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 39/258

Page 40: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 40/258

  O  p  e  n  i  n  g  a  n  d  c  l  o  s  i  n  g

38

must be initialised. BMW recommends that you

have this work performed by BMW Service.

Manual closing*

In the event of an electrical fault, you can move

the glass roof manually:

1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior

lights using the screwdriver from the toolkit,

see page 205.

2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on

each side to press the clips.

3. Remove the control unit.

4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort

will be required for moving the roof manu-

ally.

5. Insert the Allen key from the toolkit, see

page 205, into the designated aperture.

Move the glass roof in the desired direction.

6. Install the control unit and reattach the

cover of the lights.

Touring:

Panorama glass roof*Observe the panorama glass roof during

the closing procedure to avoid any inju-

ries.

Take the remote control with you when you

leave the car, otherwise children could operate

the roof and possibly injure themselves.<

Raising

Press the switch.

From the closed position, the roof is raised and

the sliding trim opens slightly.

Do not close the sliding trim forcibly with

the roof in the raised position, as this

would damage the mechanism.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 41: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 41/258

Page 42: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 42/258

Page 43: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 43/258

 41

Adjusting

Safe seated position

A seated position that suitably reflects your

requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driv-

ing with a minimum of fatigue. In conjunction

with the seat belts, the head restraints and theairbags, the seated position has a major influ-

ence on your safety in the event of an accident.

You should therefore observe the following

notes in order to maintain the protective func-

tion of the car's safety systems.

For additional notes on child safety, see

page 50.

Airbags

Keep your distance from the airbags.Always grip the steering wheel on the rim,

with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock

positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the

hands or arms in the event of the airbag being

triggered off.

No other persons, pets or objects should be

held or permitted to remain between the airbag

and yourself.

Do not use the front airbag cover on the front

passenger's side as a tray. Make sure that the

front passenger adopts a correct seated posi-

tion, e.g. does not rest feet or legs on the instru-

ment panel; otherwise he/she could sustain leg

injuries in the event of the front airbag being

triggered.

Make sure that passengers do not lean their

heads against the side or head airbags; other-

wise they could be injured should the airbags

deploy.<

Even if all these instructions are complied with,

certain injuries as a result of contact with theairbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending

on the circumstances in which an accident

occurs. Occupants with sensitive hearing may

be subject to brief and generally temporary

impaired hearing caused by the ignition and

inflation noise.

The locations of the airbags and additional

notes are given on page 90.

Head restraint

A correctly positioned head restraint reducesthe risk of neck injury in the event of an acci-

dent.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way

that its centre is at approximately ear

level; otherwise, there is an increased risk of

injury should an accident occur.<

Head restraints, see page 43.

Seat belt

Before driving off, always make sure that alloccupants have fastened their seat belts. The

airbags are a complementary safety feature and

not a substitute for the seat belts.

Never restrain more than one person with

each seat belt. Babies or small children

must not travel on the lap of another occupant.

Make sure that the belt in the pelvic area is well

down on the hips and does not press on the

abdomen.

The seat belt must not be worn touching the

neck, pass over sharp edges or hard or fragile

objects, or become trapped at any point. Avoid

twisting the seat belt, pull it tight across the pel-

vis and shoulder, and keep it as close to the

body as possible; otherwise the belt in the pel-

vic area could slip over the hips and injure the

abdomen in the event of a frontal collision.

Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull

the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise

its restraining effect could be impaired.

Touring: if the rear centre seat belt is used, thewider backrest must be locked in position, see

page 113, otherwise the centre seat belt will not

have any restraining effect.<

Seat belts, see page 46.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 44: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 44/258

  A  d  j  u  s  t  i  n  g

42

Seats

Before adjusting, note

Do not reposition the driver's seat while

the car is in motion. The seat could move

unexpectedly, leading to the driver losing con-

trol of the car, so that an accident could be

caused.

Do not recline the driver's or front passenger's

seat back too far, otherwise there will be a risk

of sliding under the seat belt in an accident, so

that the belt loses its protective effect.<

Comply with the instructions on head restraint

height on page 43 and on damaged seat belts

on page 47.

Adjusting manually

Comply with the instructions on page 42,

or there will be greater risks to personalsafety.<

Longitudinal direction

Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired

position.

After releasing the lever, move the seat gently

forward or back to make sure it engages prop-

erly.

Height

Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat orlift it off, as necessary.

Backrest

Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-

rest or lift it off, as necessary.

Tilt*

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary.

Thigh support*

Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-

ward or back.

Electrical adjustment

Comply with the instructions on page 42,

or there will be greater risks to personal

safety.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 45: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 45/258

 43

1 Longitudinal direction*

2 Height

3 Tilt*

4 Backrest

The head restraints are adjusted manually, see

Head restraints below.

Lumbar support*

The seat back contour can be altered to support

the lordosis, the curvature of the lumbar section

of the spine.

The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal col-

umn are supported, to encourage an upright but

relaxed seated position.

> To increase or reduce the curvature: press

the switch at front or rear.

> To move the curved section up or down:

press the switch at top or bottom.

Backrest width*

You can change the width of the backrest to suit

your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-

eral-support pads.

Press the switch at front or rear.

Backrest width decreases or increases accord-

ingly.

Head restraints

A correctly positioned head restraint reduces

the risk of neck injury in the event of an acci-

dent.

Adjust the head restraint in such a way

that its centre is at approximately ear

level; otherwise, there is an increased risk ofinjury should an accident occur. Only remove a

head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat

in question. Refit the head restraint before

transporting a passenger on that seat; other-

wise the passenger will be without protection

from the head restraint.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 46: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 46/258

Page 47: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 47/258

 45

Seat heating*

Press once per temperature stage.

Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.

To switch off:

Press and do not immediately release the but-

ton.

If you continue driving within approx. 15 min-

utes, the seat heating is automatically activated

at the previously set temperature.

Seat and mirror memory*

You can store and call up two different combi-

nations of driver's-seat and outside-mirror

positions.

Settings for the seat back width and lumbar

support are not stored in memory.

Memorising

1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,

see page 55.

2. Adjust the seat and outside mirrors to the

desired positions.

3. Press the button.

The LED in the button comes on.

4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the

LED goes out.

The driver's seat and outside mirror posi-

tions are stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Calling up

Do not call up memory while you are driv-

ing, as unexpected seat movement could

result in an accident.<

Convenience function

1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch

on radio readiness, see page 55.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 

or 2.

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately

when you press a seat adjustment switch or

touch one of the memory buttons.

Safety function

1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-

tion on or off, see page 55.

2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 

until the adjusting procedure is completed.

If the button was pressed accidentally:

press the button again; the LED will go out.

Calling up with the remote control

The driver's seat position last set is stored for

the remote control currently in use.

You can select the occasion on which the seat is

reset to that position.

> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.

> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.

When this Personal Profile function is

used, first make sure that the footwell

behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.

Otherwise, persons could be injured or objects

could be damaged should the seat start to

move towards the rear.<

The adjusting procedure is halted immediately

when you press a seat adjustment switch or

touch one of the memory buttons.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 48: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 48/258

Page 49: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 49/258

 47

passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger

unfasten their seat belts.

Damaged seat belts

If the seat belts have been exposed to

loads in an accident or damaged in any

way: replace the belt system, including the

seat-belt tensioner and any child restraint sys-

tems, and have the belt anchorage checked.Always have this work performed by BMW

Service or a workshop that operates to BMW

specifications and has suitably trained person-

nel, otherwise correct operation of these safety

systems is not ensured.<

Mirrors

Outside mirrorsThe outer sections of the mirrors show a larger

field of view* than the inner sections. In this

way, the view to the rear is extended and the so-

called blind spot is reduced in size.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer

than they appear. Do not gauge your dis-

tance from following traffic based on what you

see in the mirror; otherwise there is an

increased risk of accident.<

1 Adjusting

2 Switching to the other mirror or parking

position function*

3 Folding mirrors in and out*

The setting for the outside mirrors is stored for

the remote control currently in use. When the

vehicle is unlocked, the stored position is called

up automatically.

Adjusting manually

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:

press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out*

At speeds up to approx. 20 km/h, approx.

12 mph, you can fold the mirrors in or out by

pressing button 3. This can be useful in narrow

streets, for instance, or to fold the mirrors back

out into the correct position after they have

been folded in manually. Mirrors that were

folded in fold back out automatically when the

car reaches a speed of approx. 40 km/h, approx.

25 mph.

Before driving through a car wash, fold

the mirrors in manually or by pressing

button 3; otherwise, they could be damaged

due to the width of the car.<

Automatic heating*

Both outside mirrors are heated automatically

while the engine is running or the ignition is

switched on.

Passenger-side mirror tilt-down –parking position function*

Activating

1. Push the switch to the position for thedriver's-side mirror, arrow 1.

2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector

lever to position R.

The glass of the mirror on the passenger

side tilts slightly down. The road surface

close to the car, e.g. the kerb, is thus

brought within the driver's field of view in

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 50: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 50/258

  A  d  j  u  s  t  i  n  g

48

the mirror, for instance while parking the

car.

The parking position function is switched

off when you are towing a trailer.<

Deactivating

Push the switch to the position for the front pas-

senger's-side mirror, arrow 2.

Inside mirror

Turn the knob to reduce dazzle from the head-

lights of cars behind you when driving at night.

Inside and outside mirrors, automatic-dim*

The automatic-dim function of the inside and

outside mirrors* is controlled by two photo-

cells in the inside mirror. One photo-cell is in the

mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back

of the mirror.

In order to ensure that the system functions

correctly, keep the photo-cells clean, do not

cover the area between the inside mirror and

windscreen, and do not affix adhesive labels or

stickers of any kind to the windscreen directly in

front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjusting

Do not adjust the steering wheel position

while the car is in motion, or an accident

may result from any unexpected movement.<

1. Fold lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred

height and angle to suit your seated posi-tion.

3. Swing the lever back up.

Do not use force to swing the lever

back up; otherwise the mechanism

will be damaged.<

Electric steering-wheel lock 

The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-

cally when the remote control is removed or

inserted, see page 55.

Programmable buttons on steeringwheel

You can program the buttons to suit your per-

sonal preferences:

These settings are saved for the remote control

currently in use.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 51: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 51/258

 49

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press

the controller.

A list showing various functions is dis-

played:

> "Voice output of nav. system"

Voice messages from the navigation

system*

> "Air circulation on / off"

Permanent shut-off of outside-air sup-

ply, see Automatic Air Recirculation

Control, AUC on page 100

> "Mute on / off"

To mute the audio sources

> "Display on / off"To switch the control display on/off 

> "Telephone list"*To show/hide the telephone book or last

list of saved numbers displayed

> "Next entertainment source"

To change the audio source

5. Select the desired function and press the

controller.

6. Select a button if appropriate and press the

controller.

The selected function can be operated with the

appropriate button.

Using the functions

Briefly press the appropriate button on thesteering wheel.

If you have programmed "Voice output of nav.

system" for one of the buttons:

> To switch voice messaging on/off:

Press the button for longer.

> To repeat last voice message:

Press the button briefly.

> To abort a voice message during an

announcement:

Press the button briefly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 52: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 52/258

Page 53: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 53/258

 51

Functional status

> The indicator light remains on if the front

passenger airbags have been deactivated.

> The indicator light does not come on if the

front passenger airbags have been acti-

vated.

Fitting child restraintsystems

BMW Service can supply suitable child restraint

systems for every age and weight class.

When selecting, installing and using child

restraint systems, observe the manufac-

turer's instructions, otherwise the protective

effect could be impaired.

Following an accident, have all components of

the child restraint system and the seat belt that

was used to secure it checked by BMW Serviceand renewed if necessary. Always have this

work performed either by BMW Service or by a

workshop that operates to BMW specifications

and has suitably trained personnel.<

Conventional child restraint systems are

designed to be secured with a lap belt or with

the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt.

Incorrectly or improperly fitted child restraint

systems can increase a child's risk of injury.

Always follow the instructions for installing thesystem precisely.

On the front passenger's seat

Before fitting a child restraint system to

the front passenger's seat, make sure

that the front and side airbags for the front pas-

senger are deactivated, otherwise there is an

increased risk of injury should the airbags

deploy.<

Seat height

Before fitting a universal child restraint system

to the front passenger's seat, move the seat up

as far as it will go in order to achieve optimal

placement of the seat belt. Do not change the

height of the seat after fitting the child restraintsystem.

Backrest width*

The backrest width of the front passen-

ger's seat must be at its widest possible

setting. After fitting the child seat, do not

change the setting. Otherwise the child seat's

stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-

ited.<

1. Set the backrest to maximum width, seepage 43.

2. Fit the child seat.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 54: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 54/258

  C  h  i  l  d  s  a  f  e  t  y

52

ISOFIX child seat mountings

For details of how to install and use ISO-

FIX child restraint systems, please con-

sult the separate operating and safety instruc-

tions supplied by the system's manufacturer.<

Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems

The following ISOFIX child restraint systemsmay be used on the allocated seats in your vehi-

cle. The corresponding designations can be

found on the child seats.

Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors

Before fitting the child seat, pull the belt away

from the area around the child seat mountings.

Make sure that both lower ISOFIX

anchors are properly engaged and that

the child restraint system is resting securely

against the backrest.<

Rear seats with through-loadingsystem

The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are

located beneath the labelled caps.

Rear seats without through-loadingsystem

The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are

located at the positions marked by the arrows,

in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Front passenger's seat*

The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are

located at the positions marked by the arrows,

in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Mounting points for upper ISOFIXretaining strap

Use the mounting points for the upper

ISOFIX retaining strap only to secure

child restraint systems; otherwise, the mount-

ing points could be damaged.<

Rear seats Front passenger's seat*

A - ISO / F3 A - ISO / F3

B - ISO / F2 B - ISO / F2

B1 - ISO / F2X B1 - ISO / F2X

C - ISO / R3 C - ISO / R3

D - ISO / R2 D - ISO / R2

E - ISO / R1 E - ISO / R1

F - ISO / L1

G - ISO / L2

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 55: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 55/258

 53

Saloon

For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an

upper retaining strap there are two additional

mounting points, see arrows.

Touring

For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an

upper retaining strap there are two additional

mounting points in the luggage area, see

arrows. To access the mounting points: remove

the respective cover.

Positioning the upper ISOFIX retainingstrap

Make sure that the upper retaining strap

does not pass over sharp edges and is not

twisted on its path to the upper mounting point.

Otherwise the child restraint system cannot

protect the child as intended in the event of an

accident.<

Saloon: rear seats

Touring: rear seats

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraint

3 Hook for the upper retaining strap

4 Mounting point

5 Rear window shelf/luggage area floor

6 Seat backrest

7 Upper retaining strap of the child restraintsystem

Before use, flip the mounting points and the

head restraints* upwards, if necessary.

1. Push the head restraint upwards.

2. Guide the upper retaining strap between

the head restraint posts.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 56: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 56/258

Page 57: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 57/258

 55

Driving

Ignition lock 

Inserting the remote control in theignition lock.

Insert the remote control fully into the ignition

lock.> Radio readiness is switched on.

Individual electrical consumers can operate.

> The electric steering wheel lock disen-

gages audibly.

Insert the remote control into the ignition

lock before you move the vehicle, other-

wise the electric steering wheel lock will not dis-

engage and you will not be able to steer the

car.<

Convenient access*

With convenient access, only insert the remote

control in the ignition lock in exceptional cases,

see page 34.

Removing the remote control from theignition lock 

Do not use force to remove the remote

control from the ignition lock, as other-

wise damage can occur.<

Before removing the remote control, first push

it in as far as it will go to release the locking

mechanism.

> The ignition is switched off if it was on

beforehand.

> The electric steering wheel lock engages

audibly.

Automatic gearbox

You cannot take out the remote control unless

the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.

Start/stop button

Each time the start/stop button is pressed,

radio readiness or the ignition are switched on

or off.

The engine is started when you press the

start/stop button and depress the clutch if

the car has a manual gearbox, or the brake if the

car has an automatic gearbox.<

Radio readiness

Individual electrical consumers can operate.

The time and the outside temperature are dis-

played in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off automatically:

> When the remote control is removed from

the ignition lock

> When you touch the panel above the door

lock, if the car is fitted with convenient

access*, see Locking on page 35

Ignition on

All electrical consumers are ready for operation.

The odometer and trip distance recorder are

displayed in the instrument cluster.

When the engine is switched off, please

switch off the ignition and all electrical

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 58: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 58/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g

56

consumers you are not using, in order to pre-

serve the battery.<

Radio readiness and ignition off 

All indicator lights, warning lights and displays

in the instrument cluster go out.

Starting the engineNever run the engine in enclosed spaces,

as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can

lead to loss of consciousness with fatal conse-

quences. The exhaust gas contains carbon

monoxide, which is colourless and odourless,

but highly toxic. Do not leave the car unat-

tended with the engine running, as this consti-

tutes a hazard.

Before leaving the car with the engine running,

place the gearbox in idle or move the selectorlever to position P and fully apply the handbrake

to prevent the car from moving.<

Do not warm up the engine with the car at a

standstill; it is preferable to set off, driving at

moderate engine speeds.

The engine is started when you press the

start/stop button and depress the clutch if

the car has a manual gearbox, or the brake if the

car has an automatic gearbox. If you do not wish

to start the engine, do not depress the clutch orbrake.<

Avoid starting, stopping and restarting

the engine in rapid succession as well as

repeated attempts to start the engine if it does

not fire, otherwise unburned or only partially

combusted fuel could reach the catalytic con-

verter, which could overheat and be damaged

as a result.<

Manual gearbox

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-

venient access, in the vehicle, see page 34.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.

3. Press the start/stop button.

Starting proceeds automatically for a certain

time, and ceases automatically as soon as theengine has started.

Automatic gearbox

Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-

venient access, in the vehicle, see page 34.

1. Depress the brake.

2. Move the selector lever to position P.

3. Press the start/stop button.

Starting proceeds automatically for a certain

time, and ceases automatically as soon as the

engine has started.

Diesel engine

When the engine is cold and the temperature is

below approx. 06/327, starting may be

delayed by automatic preheating. In the instru-

ment cluster, the preheat indicator light comes

on and at the same time a message appears on

the control display.

Stopping the engine

Always take the remote control with you

when you leave the vehicle.

When parking on an incline, fully apply the

handbrake, otherwise the car could begin to

roll.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 59: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 59/258

 57

Manual gearbox

1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/

stop button.

2. Engage first gear or reverse.

3. Fully apply the handbrake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni-

tion lock, see page 55.

Automatic gearbox

1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-

tor lever to position P.

2. Press the start/stop button.

3. Fully apply the handbrake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni-

tion lock, see page 55.

Handbrake

The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent

a stationary car from rolling away; it acts on the

rear wheels.

Indicator light

The indicator light is lit, and when you

drive off an acoustic signal sounds in

addition: the handbrake is still applied.

Applying

The lever engages by itself.

Releasing

Raise slightly, press the knob and move the

lever down.

In exceptional cases, if the handbrake has

to be used to slow or stop the car, do not

pull the lever up too hard. Keep the knob on the

lever held in all the time.

Otherwise, violent application of the handbrake

could lock the rear wheels and cause the rear of

the car to skid.<

To prevent corrosion or an imbalance

between the brakes on the right and left

side, apply the handbrake lightly from time to

time when coasting to a standstill, provided thatit is safe to do so.

The brake lights do not come on when the

handbrake is applied.<

Manual gearbox

When shifting in the 5th/6th-gear plane,

press the shift lever to the right. Other-

wise the engine could be damaged if you inad-

vertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<

Reverse

Engage this only while the car is standing still.

When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a

slight resistance has to be overcome.

Automatic gearbox withSteptronic*

In addition to the fully automatic mode, you canperform manual gearshifts with the Steptronic,

see page 59.

Stopping the car

Before leaving the car with the engine

running, move the selector lever to posi-

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 60: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 60/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g

58

tion P and apply the handbrake to prevent the

car from moving.<

Taking out the remote control

In order to remove the remote control from the

ignition lock, you must first move the selector

lever to position P and switch off the engine:

interlock. Remove the remote control from the

ignition lock, see page 55.

Selector lever positions

P R N D M/S + –

Displays in the instrument cluster

P R N D DS M1 to M6

The selector lever position is displayed, or the

current gear in the manual mode.

Changing selector lever positions

> With the ignition switched on or the engine

running, the selector lever can be moved

out of position P: interlock.

> Before moving the lever away from P or N

with the vehicle stationary, first depress the

brake, otherwise the selector lever will

refuse to move: shiftlock.

Apply the brake until you are ready to

move off; this will prevent the car from

creeping when a gear is selected.<

A lock prevents the selector lever from being

inadvertently moved to the R or P position. To

disengage the lock, press the button on the

front of the selector lever, see arrow.

P Park 

Engage this only while the car is standing still.

The rear wheels are locked.

R Reverse

Engage this only while the car is standing still.

N Neutral

You can select this in a car wash, for example.

The car will be able to roll.

D Drive, automatic position

Use this position for all normal driving. All for-

ward gears are selected automatically.

Kick-down

Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum

performance.

Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the

regular full-throttle position; increased resist-

ance will be felt.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 61: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 61/258

Page 62: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 62/258

Page 63: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 63/258

 61

Fast wiper speed

Press twice or press beyond the pressure point.

The wipers switch to normal speed as the car

comes to a halt.

Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*

If the car is not fitted with a rain sensor, the

intermittent-wipe time is a preset.

If the car is fitted with a rain sensor, the time

between wipes is controlled automatically and

depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The

sensor is mounted on the windscreen, directly

in front of the inside mirror.

Activating intermittent wipe or rainsensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-

ton comes on.

Setting speed for intermittent wipe orsensitivity of the rain sensor

Turn knurled wheel 5 upwards or downwards.

Deactivating intermittent wipe or rainsensor

Press button again, arrow 3.

The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic

car wash, to prevent the car's wipers from

being activated inadvertently and damaged.<

Cleaning windscreen and headlights*

Pull the lever, arrow 4.

Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed

onto the windscreen and the wipers are oper-

ated for a short time.

When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the

headlights are cleaned simultaneously at prac-

tical intervals.

Only operate the washer systems and

cleaning equipment if you are certain that

the fluid will not freeze to the windscreen and

interfere with the view ahead. Anti-freeze

should therefore be added to the fluid, see

Washer fluid.Do not run the washer systems if the washer

fluid reservoir is empty, or the washer pump will

be damaged.<

Windscreen washer jets

The windscreen washer jets are heated auto-

matically while the engine is running or the igni-

tion switched on*.

Touring: rear window wiper

1 Intermittent wipe. When reverse gear isengaged, continuous operation is activated.

2 Cleaning the rear window

The rear window wiper does not move if the

lever is in position 1 before the ignition is

switched on.

To switch on the rear window wiper:

1. Move the lever to its home position.

2. Select the desired position again.

Do not run the washer systems if the res-ervoir for washer fluid is empty, or the

washer pump will be damaged.<

Washer fluid

Anti-freeze for the washer fluid is highly

flammable. Keep it away from possible

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 64: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 64/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g

62

ignition sources and store it only in the carefully

sealed original containers, out of reach of chil-

dren. Comply with the instructions on the con-

tainer.<

Filler neck for washer fluid

Only top up washer fluid when the engine

has cooled down. This prevents contact

with hot engine components. Otherwise, if thefluid is spilled, there is a risk of fire and personal

safety is endangered.<

All washer jets are served by a single reservoir.

When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has

been added if required, always follow the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

Mix the water and anti-freeze before filling

the washer fluid reservoir, to make sure

the correct mixing ratio is maintained.<

Capacity

Approx. 6 litres, approx. 10.6 Imp. pints.

Cruise control* for 4-cylinderengines

The principle

You can use the cruise control if road speed is at

least approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph. The car thenmemorises and maintains the speed that you

specify using the lever on the steering column.

Do not use cruise control if driving at con-

stant speed is prevented by adverse con-

ditions, e.g. by winding roads, heavy traffic or

poor surface conditions such as snow, rain, ice

or loose material. Otherwise you could lose

control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a

result.<

One lever for all functions

1 Memorising and maintaining speed or

accelerating

2 Memorising and maintaining speed or

decelerating

3 Deactivating cruise control4 Recalling a speed memorised beforehand

Maintaining current speed

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.

The car's current speed is memorised and

maintained.

If engine braking alone is insufficient on a down-

hill gradient, the set speed may be exceeded. It

may in turn prove impossible to maintain speed

on uphill gradients if current engine power out-put is insufficient.

Increasing speed

Tap the lever repeatedly, arrow 1, until the

desired speed is reached.

Each time the lever is tapped, the car's speed

increases by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.

Accelerating using the lever

Press the lever, arrow 1, until the desired speedis reached.

The car accelerates without the accelerator

pedal being pressed. The system memorises

and maintains the speed.

Reducing speed

Pull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until the

desired speed is reached.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 65: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 65/258

 63

Functions analogous to increasing speed or

accelerating, except that the speed is

decreased.

Deactivating cruise control

Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti-

vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

> When you depress the clutch or shift to idle

position in vehicles with manual gearbox

> When you move the selector lever to posi-

tion N in vehicles with automatic gearbox

> When you drive above or below the set

speed for an extended time, e.g. by press-

ing the accelerator pedal

> When DSC is intervening

Recalling a speed memorisedbeforehand

Press the button, arrow 4. The speed last mem-

orised is recalled and maintained.

The memorised speed is deleted as soon as the

ignition is switched off.

Cruise control* for 6-cylinder

engines

The principle

You can use the cruise control with brake func-

tion if road speed is at least approx. 30 km/h or

20 mph. The car then memorises and maintains

the speed that you specify using the lever on

the steering column. In order to maintain the

specified speed, the system brakes the vehicle

when the engine braking effect is insufficient on

downhill gradients.

Do not use cruise control if adverse con-

ditions prevent driving at constant speed,

e.g. winding roads, heavy traffic or poor surface

conditions such as snow, rain, ice or loose

material. Otherwise you could lose control of

the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<

Manual gearbox

You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-

vated. An indicator light notifies you that you

should shift gears when you drive for an

extended period at very high or very low engine

speeds, or the system is deactivated.

One lever for all functions

1 Memorising and maintaining speed or

accelerating

2 Memorising and maintaining speed or

decelerating

3 Deactivating cruise control

4 Recalling a speed memorised beforehand

Maintaining current speed

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.

The car's current speed is memorised and

maintained. It is displayed in the speedometerand briefly in the instrument cluster.

On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to

maintain the set speed if current engine power

output is insufficient. On downhill gradients, the

system will brake the car slightly if engine brak-

ing alone is insufficient.

Increasing desired speed

Press the lever repeatedly to the pressure point

or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed isset.

> Each time the lever is pressed to the pres-

sure point, the desired speed is increased

by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the

pressure point, the desired speed is

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 66: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 66/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g

64

increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or

5 mph on the speedometer display.

The system memorises and maintains the

speed.

Accelerating using the lever

Accelerating slightly:

Press the lever to the pressure point, arrow 1,until the desired speed is reached.

Accelerating significantly:

Press the lever beyond the pressure point,

arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The car accelerates without the accelerator

pedal being pressed. The system memorises

and maintains the speed.

Reducing speed

Pull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until thedesired speed is displayed.

Functions analogous to increasing desired

speed, except that the speed is reduced.

Deactivating cruise control

Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.

The displays in the speedometer disappear.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti-

vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

> When you shift gears very slowly or shift to

idle position in vehicles with manual gear-

box

> When you move the selector lever to posi-

tion N in vehicles with automatic gearbox

> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC

> When DSC or ABS is intervening

Cruise control is not deactivated by pressing

the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator

pedal is released, the memorised speed is again

achieved and maintained.

Warning light

The warning light comes on when the

cruise control has been deactivated

by using the handbrake or as a result

of DSC intervening. A message appears on the

control display.

Recalling a speed memorisedbeforehand

Tap the button, arrow 4. The memorised speed

is regained and maintained.

The memorised speed value is deleted and can

no longer be called up in the following

instances:

> When driving stability control systems are

intervening

> Cars with manual gearbox: when you shift

gears very slowly or shift to idle position

> Cars with automatic gearbox: when you

move the selector lever to position N

> When the ignition is switched off 

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Memorised speed

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

If --- km/h or --- mph temporarily appears

in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-

sible that the system prerequisites for operation

are currently not met.

Calling up Check Control messages, see

page 81.<

MalfunctionThe warning light comes on when the

system has failed. A message

appears on the control display. You

can find more information starting on page 80.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 67: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 67/258

 65

Active Cruise Control*

The principle

Active Cruise Control enables you to select a

desired speed which the vehicle automatically

maintains when the road ahead of you is clear.

Within the limits of its capability, the system

automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a

slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify

the distance to be maintained from the vehicle

in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the

distance is speed-dependent. To maintain dis-

tance, the system automatically reduces the

fuel supply, brakes slightly if necessary, and

accelerates again when the vehicle in front of

you starts to move more quickly. As soon as the

road in front of you is clear, the car is acceler-

ated to your desired speed. This speed will also

be maintained on downhill slopes, but may beunder-run on uphill slopes if engine output is

insufficient.

Read and carefully comply with the information

on the System limitations starting on page 68 

so that you can understand the system's range

of applications and use the system appropri-

ately.

Braking sensation

> If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-tem is braking, pedal sensation will be

slightly different from the usual.

> Possible noises during automatic braking

are normal.

Manual gearbox

You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-

vated. An indicator light notifies you that you

should shift gears when you drive for an

extended period at very high or very low enginespeeds, or the system is deactivated.

Range of applications

The ideal road-speed range for using the

system on well-developed motorways and sec-

ondary roads is about 80-140 km/h, approx.

50-85 mph. However, all local speed limit regu-

lations must be observed.

The minimum desired speed is 30 km/h or

20 mph, whereas the maximum desired speed

is 180 km/h or 110 mph.

Active Cruise Control does not release

you from your personal responsibility to

drive safely.

Consider road-surface, weather and visibility

conditions to decide whether and how the sys-

tem should be used.Use the system only when traffic is flowing

smoothly and not on unsurfaced roads or roads

with sharp bends nor when there is road ice,

fog, snow or heavy rain.

Adjust your desired speed to traffic conditions,

and check your driving speed and safety dis-

tance. Be prepared to brake at all times. Other-

wise, driving conditions could result which pose

a risk of accident.<

One lever for all functions

1 Memorising and increasing desired speed

2 Memorising and decreasing desired speed

3 Deactivating cruise control, see page 67

4 Calling up memorised desired speed and

distance, see page 67

5 Selecting the distance from the vehicle

ahead, see page 66

Memorising the current speed

Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 68: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 68/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g

66

The car's current speed is memorised. It is dis-

played in the speedometer and briefly in the

instrument cluster.

Increasing desired speed

Press or tap the lever to the pressure point or

beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis-

played.

> Each time the lever is tapped to the pres-

sure point, the desired speed is increased

by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.

> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the

pressure point, the desired speed is

increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or

5 mph on the speedometer display.

The speed then displayed is memorised and

reached as soon as the road ahead of you is

clear.

Decreasing desired speed

Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is

displayed.

Other functions analogous to those described

under Increasing desired speed.

Selecting distance

> Press downwards:

Increase distance

> Press upwards:

Decrease distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the instru-

ment cluster.

Adapt distances to traffic and weather

conditions; otherwise, accident risks

could result. At the same time, be sure to

observe the required safety distance from the

vehicle in front of you.<

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

When you are using the system

for the first time after starting theengine, this distance is always

set. The distance in meters

corresponds to approximately

half of the numerical value in the

km/h speedometer display.

Distance 4

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 69: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 69/258

 67

Deactivating cruise control

Press the lever upwards or downwards,

arrow 3. The displays in the speedometer dis-

appear.

In addition, the system is automatically deacti-

vated:

> When you brake the vehicle

> When your road speed is less than 30 km/h

or 20 mph due to a traffic situation> When you shift gears very slowly or shift to

idle position in vehicles with manual gear-

box

> When you move the selector lever to posi-

tion N in vehicles with automatic gearbox

> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC

> When DSC or ABS is intervening

> When the system does not detect any

objects for a lengthy period of time, e.g. oninfrequently driven roads without defined

boundaries or due to a dirty radar sensor,

see page 68

When the system is deactivated, you

must brake the vehicle yourself and/or

manoeuvre as necessary, otherwise there is a

risk of accident.<

Warning light

The warning light comes on whenActive Cruise Control has been auto-

matically deactivated by driving

slower than 30 km/h or 20 mph, by using the

handbrake or as a result of DSC intervening. A

message appears on the control display.

Calling up memorised desired speedand distance

Tap the button, arrow 4.

The memorised speed and distance are

regained and maintained.

The memorised speed value is deleted and can

no longer be called up in the following

instances:

> When driving stability control systems are

intervening

> Cars with manual gearbox: when you shift

gears very slowly or shift to idle position

> Cars with automatic gearbox: when you

move the selector lever to position N

> When the ignition is switched off 

Displays in the instrument cluster

1 Memorised desired speed

2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead

Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis-

tance; driver must brake the vehicle

Flashes in yellow: driving stability control

systems are intervening; cruise control is

deactivated

3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead

The indicator lights up as soon as the sys-

tem is activated

4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis-played

If --- km/h or --- mph temporarily appears

in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-

sible that the system prerequisites for operation

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 70: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 70/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g

68

are currently not met. Calling up Check Control

messages, see page 81.<

Warning lights

The indicator 2 flashes in red, and

a signal sounds.

The system indicates that you

must brake and/or manoeuvre the

vehicle yourself. Active CruiseControl cannot automatically restore the mem-

orised distance to the vehicle ahead.

This indicator does not release you from your

responsibility to adapt your desired speed and

driving style to prevailing driving conditions.

The indicator 2 flashes in yellow.

The prerequisites for operating

Active Cruise Control are not met,

e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC

interventions. Active Cruise Con-trol is deactivated. You can reactivate the sys-

tem if desired by tapping or pulling the lever

when road and traffic conditions permit this. It is

not possible to call up the speed.

Radar sensor

The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead

may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,

snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor

located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure

to use particular care when removing any layers

of snow or ice from the sensor.

When the radar sensor is not properly posi-

tioned, Active Cruise Control cannot be acti-

vated at all.

Malfunction

The warning light comes on when the

system has failed. A message

appears on the control display. You

can find more information starting on page 80.

System limitations

The detection range of the radar sensor and

automatic braking capacity are limited. It is pos-

sible, for example, that two-wheelers in front of

you are not recognised.

The system does not decelerate your car

when a standing obstacle is in the same

lane, e.g. a vehicle at a red light or at the end of

a traffic jam. Take the appropriate action your-

self, as otherwise there is a risk of accident.<

The system also does not react to oncoming

vehicles in the same lane.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 71: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 71/258

 69

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle from a neighbouring lane

swerves into the lane in front of you, the system

does not detect the car until it is fully in the

same lane.

When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves

into your lane, the system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance automatically.

The same applies when you are driving signifi-

cantly faster than the vehicle in front of you, e.g.

when you are rapidly approaching a lorry. There

is a risk of collision. Once the system has estab-

lished that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it

will indicate that you must brake and/or

manoeuvre the vehicle yourself. Take the

appropriate action yourself, as otherwise there

is a risk of accident.<

Characteristics in bends

If the desired speed chosen is too high for a

bend, the system reduces the speed while cor-nering. It cannot, however, detect bends in

advance. Therefore, choose a suitable speed

well before entering a bend.

Due to the radar sensor's limited detection

range, bends may lead to vehicles ahead being

detected only later or not at all.

When approaching a bend, the system may

temporarily react to vehicles in an adjacent lane

because of the curvature of the bend. Should

the system decelerate the vehicle in such an

instance, this can be compensated for by

pressing the accelerator pedal briefly. Once the

accelerator pedal is released, the system is

active again and regulates the car's speed auto-

matically.

Your responsibility

Your actions have priority at all times. When you

press the accelerator pedal while driving with

Active Cruise Control, the automatic braking

function will be temporarily interrupted. Once

you release the accelerator pedal, the desired

speed or the selected distance to the vehicle

ahead is taken into account.

Do not leave your foot on the accelerator

pedal, and make sure that no objects,such as floor mats, are pressing on the acceler-

ator pedal. Otherwise the system may not be

able to brake the vehicle.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 72: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 72/258

  E  v  e  r  y  t  h  i  n  g  u  n  d

  e  r  c  o  n  t  r  o  l

70

Everything under control

Distance recorder, outsidetemperature display, clock

1 Knob in the instrument cluster

2 Outside temperature display and clock

3 Distance recorder – odometer – and trip dis-tance recorder

Knob in the instrument cluster

> When the ignition is on, pushing the knob

resets the trip distance recorder

> When the ignition is off, pushing the knob

displays the time, outside temperature and

odometer for a short time

Units of measureTo select the respective units of measure, km or

miles for the odometer as well as6 or7 for

the outside temperature, see page 75.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Time, outside temperature display

Setting the clock, see page 78.

Outside temperature warning

Once the temperature reading falls to +36/

377, a signal sounds and a warning light

comes on. There is an increased risk of icy

roads.

Sheet ice can also form at temperatures

above +36/377. You should therefore

drive carefully over bridges and shaded roads,

for example; otherwise there is an increased risk

of accidents.<

Distance recorder – odometer – and tripdistance recorder

Resetting trip distance recorder:

With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in

the instrument cluster.

Car parked

If you still want to view the time, outside tem-

perature and odometer reading briefly after the

remote control has been taken out of the igni-

tion lock:

Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.

Revolution counter

Never force the engine speed up into the red

warning field, see arrow. In this zone the fuel

supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 73: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 73/258

 71

Coolant temperature

Should the coolant and therefore the engine

become too hot, a warning light will come on. In

addition, a message will appear on the control

display.

Checking coolant level, see page 202.

Energy Control*

Shows the momentary fuel consumption. This

enables you to check how economical and envi-

ronmentally friendly your current driving style

is.

Engine oil temperature*

With the engine at operating temperature, the

engine oil temperature lies between approx.

1006 and 1206, approx. 2127 and 2487.If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-

sage appears on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity:

> Petrol engine: approx. 63 litres, approx.

13.9 Imp. gal.

> Diesel engine: approx. 61 litres, approx.

13.4 Imp. gal.

Notes on refuelling, see page 193.

If the car's inclination varies while driving, forexample on a long mountain road, the value in

the display may fluctuate to some extent.

Reserve

Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve

zone, a message is shown on the control dis-

play for a short time and the remaining operat-

ing range is displayed on the computer. If the

remaining range is less than approx. 50 km,

approx. 30 miles, the message is displayed per-

manently on the control display.

If the remaining operating range is below

50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are

not assured and damage may occur.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 74: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 74/258

  E  v  e  r  y  t  h  i  n  g  u  n  d

  e  r  c  o  n  t  r  o  l

72

Computer

Displays in the instrument cluster

Calling up information

Press the button in the turn indicator lever.

The following items of information are dis-

played in the order listed:

> Range> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> Current fuel consumption*

> No information

To set the corresponding units of measure, see

Units of measure on page 75.

Range

This display indicates how far the car can prob-ably be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.

The range is calculated on the basis of the way

the car has been driven over the past 30 km,

approx. 20 miles, and the amount of fuel cur-

rently in the tank.

If the remaining operating range is below

50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are

not assured and damage may occur.<

Average speed

The calculation of average speed ignores any

stationary periods during which the engine was

switched off.

With the journey computer, see page 73, you

can have the average speed for another trip dis-

played.

To reset the average speed: press the button in

the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption

The average fuel consumption is calculated for

the period since the engine was last started.

With the journey computer, see page 73, you

can have the average consumption for another

trip displayed.

To reset the average consumption: press the

button in the turn indicator lever for approx.

2 seconds.

Current fuel consumption*

Shows the momentary fuel consumption. This

enables you to check how economical and envi-

ronmentally friendly your current driving style

is.

Displays on the control display

You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for

principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up

"Navigation".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controlleruntil "On-board Info" is selected and press

the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 75: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 75/258

Page 76: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 76/258

Page 77: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 77/258

 75

2 Button for:

> Confirming selected display or set val-

ues

> Calling up computer information 72

3 When the lights are switched on: instrument

lighting brightness 96

4 Calling up Check Control 80

5 Checking engine oil level* 199

6 Setting the clock 78

7 Setting the date 79

8 Viewing Next Service indicator 75

Exiting displaysThe outside temperature reading and the time

reappear when you press button 2 or if you

make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If

required, complete the current setting first.

Units of measure

You can set units of measure.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Language / Units" and press the

controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Units" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select the desired menu item and press thecontroller.

7. Select the desired unit of measure and

press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Next Service indicator

The remaining driving distance and the date of

the next scheduled service are displayed briefly

immediately after you start the engine or switch

on the ignition.

The extent of service work required can

be read out from the remote control by

your BMW Service Advisor.<

For certain maintenance operations, you can

view the respective distance remaining or due

date individually in the instrument cluster.

1. Switch on the ignition, see page 55.

2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up

or down repeatedly until the appropriate

symbol appears in the display, accompa-

nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".

3. Press button 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 78: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 78/258

Page 79: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 79/258

 77

troller until "Status" is selected and press

the controller.

A list of selected maintenance operations and, if

applicable, inspections required by law is dis-

played.

You can call up more information on each entry:

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols

No servicing is currently needed.

Servicing or an inspection required by law

is due. Please schedule a service appoint-

ment.

Servicing is overdue.

Entering deadlines for statutoryinspections*

Make sure that the date on the control display is

always set correctly, see page 79, otherwise

the Condition Based Service CBS cannot func-

tion correctly.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-

ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Service requirements" is selected and

press the controller.

6. Select "Status" and press the controller.7. Select "Stat. vehicle insp." and press the

controller.

8. Select "Schedule date for service" and

press the controller. The month is selected.

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

The year is selected.

11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

12. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

The date input is memorised.

To exit the menu:

Select and press the controller.

More information on the BMW Maintenance

System can be found on page 203.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 80: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 80/258

  E  v  e  r  y  t  h  i  n  g  u  n  d

  e  r  c  o  n  t  r  o  l

78

Clock 

The settings are saved for the remote control

currently in use, see also Personal Profile on

page 26.

Setting the clock 

In the instrument clusterTo set the 12h/24h mode, see Setting the time

format below.

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up

or down repeatedly until the appropriate

symbol appears in the display, accompa-

nied by the time and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

3. Use button 1 to set the hours.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

7. Press button 2.

The system accepts the new time.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button once or twice until

the start menu is displayed.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is

selected and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the controller forwards

to switch to the uppermost field.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 81: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 81/258

 79

6. Turn the controller until "Clock" is selected

and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is

selected and press the controller.

Adjusting settings

8. Turn the controller to set the hour and press

the controller.

9. Turn the controller to set the minute and

press the controller.

The system accepts the new time.

Switching on the hour signal*

Shortly before the hour, three signal tones will

be emitted.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.

 The hour signal is switched on.

Setting the time format

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is

selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Time format" and press the control-

ler.

6. Select the desired format and press the

controller.

Date

The settings are saved for the remote control

currently in use, see also Personal Profile on

page 26.

Adjusting the date

In the instrument cluster

To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, see

Setting the date format below.

1. Press button 1 in the turn indicator lever up

or down repeatedly until the appropriate

symbol appears in the display, accompa-

nied by the date and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.

4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.

5. Set the month and the year in the same way.

6. Press button 2.

The system accepts the new date.

Via iDrive

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 82: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 82/258

  E  v  e  r  y  t  h  i  n  g  u  n  d

  e  r  c  o  n  t  r  o  l

80

4. Select "Date" and press the controller.

5. Select "Set date" and press the controller.

The first part of the date setting is selected.

6. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

7. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

The next part of the setting is selected.

8. Complete the setting. Once the setting has

been completed, the system accepts the

new date.

Setting the date format

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is

selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Date format" and press the control-ler.

6. Select the desired format and press the

controller.

Check Control

The principle

The Check Control monitors vehicle functions

and alerts you to any faults in the systems mon-itored. A Check Control message includes indi-

cator or warning lights in the instrument cluster,

an acoustic signal in some circumstances, and

text messages at the bottom of the control dis-

play.

Indicator and warning lights

Indicator and warning lights can come on in var-

ious combinations and colours, both in panel 1 

and display 2.

 indicates that Check Control messages have

been stored. You can have the Check Control

messages shown later on.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom of the control dis-

play explain the meaning of the indicator andwarning lights being shown.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 83: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 83/258

 81

For most Check Control messages you can

have additional information displayed, e.g.

regarding the possible cause of a malfunction

and what measures should be taken, see

page 81.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown

when the corresponding light comes on.

Exit the displayed information:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the button in the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages remain in the

display until the faults have been rectified.

These messages cannot be hidden. If several

faults occur at the same time, they are dis-

played in succession.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment,

they may be marked with the symbol

shown here.Other messages are automatically hidden after

approx. 20 seconds, but are not deleted.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment,

they may be marked with the symbol

shown here.

Viewing Check Control messagesstored in memory

1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up

or down repeatedly until the appropriate

symbol appears in the display, accompa-

nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".

2. Press button 2.

"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check

Control messages.

If a Check Control message has been

stored, the corresponding light is shown. It

is accompanied by a text message on the

control display.

3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.

4. Press button 2.

The display again shows the outside tem-

perature and the time.

Viewing additional information later on

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-

ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 84: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 84/258

  E  v  e  r  y  t  h  i  n  g  u  n  d

  e  r  c  o  n  t  r  o  l

82

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Check Control messages" is selected

and press the controller.

6. Select a text message and press the con-

troller.

To exit the display:

Select and press the controller.

Speed limit

You can enter a speed at which you are to be

alerted by means of a Check Control message.

You can use this feature e.g. to ensure that you

do not exceed a municipal speed limit.

A renewal of this reminder will not be given until

you have undercut the limit speed once by at

least 5 km/h, approx. 3 mph.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Call up "Navigation".

3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

Setting or changing limit

1. Select a speed value and press the control-

ler.

2. Turn the controller to adjust the limit.

3. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

Adopting actual speed as the limit

Select "Accept current speed" and press the

controller. The actual speed is adopted as the

limit value.

Activating limit

Select "On" and press the controller.

 Limit is switched on.

Stopwatch

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Call up "Navigation".

3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-

troller.

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-

ler.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 85: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 85/258

 83

Starting, stopping or resetting

> Select "Start" and press the controller. The

stopwatch starts at the time displayed.

> Select "Reset" and press the controller.

The stopwatch is reset and starts again if it

was running previously.

> Select "Stop" and press the controller.

Timekeeping is stopped.

Taking an interim time reading

Select "Interm. time" and press the controller.

The intermediate reading is displayed below

the current time display.

You can also call up other functions at any

time while the stopwatch is running. The

stopwatch continues to run in the back-

ground.<

Altering settings

Language on the control display

The language used on the control display can

be changed. The setting is stored for the

remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Languages" is selected and press the

controller.

5. Select "Text language" and press the con-

troller. You can switch to another language

for the display texts and navigation mes-

sages.

6. Select the desired language and press the

controller.

Brightness of the control display

The brightness is automatically adjusted to

ambient light conditions. Note, however, that

you can change the basic setting while the low-

beam headlights are switched on. The setting is

stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Brightness" is selected and press the

controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is obtained.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 86: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 86/258

  T  e  c  h  n  i  c  a  l  f  e

  a  t  u  r  e  s  f  o  r  d  r  i  v  i  n  g  c  o  m  f  o  r  t  a  n  d  s  a  f  e  t  y

84

Technical features for driving comfort andsafety

Park Distance Control PDC*

The principle

PDC assists you with manoeuvring into a park-

ing space. Acoustic signals and a visual indica-

tor warn you of the presence of an object in

front of * or behind your car. Four ultrasonic

sensors in either bumper measure the distance

to the nearest object.

The sensors cover a range of approx. 2 m,

approx. 6 ft 7 in. However, an acoustic warning

does not sound until an object is approx. 60 cm,

approx. 2 ft, from the front sensors* or rear cor-

ner sensors, and approx. 1.50 m, approx. 5 ft

from the rear centre sensors.

PDC is a parking aid which is capable of

registering objects approached at low

speed, as is usually the case when the car is

being parked. Avoid approaching an object rap-

idly, otherwise the system may be unable to

alert you in sufficient time due to the physical

principles involved.<

If the car is towing a trailer, the rear sensors will

be unable to supply meaningful signals. Theytherefore do not come on.

Automatic activation

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on, the system is activated after approx.

1 second when you engage reverse gear or

move the gear selector lever to position R. Wait

briefly before starting to drive, to allow the sys-

tem to become active.

Switching on manually

Press the button; the LED comes on.

Switching off manually

Press the button again; the LED will go out.

If you drive for approx. 50 m, approx. 55 yd, or at

a speed exceeding approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph,

the system is deactivated and the LED goes

out. Switch the system on again as necessary.

Audible warning signals

An intermittent tone indicates the position of an

object as the car approaches it. For example,

the tone sounds at the rear if the systemdetects an object behind the car. The closer the

car approaches the object, the more rapid the

sequence of signals. When the distance to a

detected object is less than approx. 30 cm,

approx. 12 in, the signal becomes continuous.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.

3 seconds:

> If you remain in front of an object that was

detected by only one of the corner sensors

> If you are driving parallel to a wall.

Malfunction

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster comes on. PDC has failed. A

message appears on the control dis-

play. Have the system checked.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 87: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 87/258

 85

As a precautionary measure, keep the sensors

clean and free from ice, so that they always

operate reliably. When using a high-pressure

cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended

periods of time and only from a distance of at

least 10 cm, approx. 4 in.

Manual operation

The LED above the button flashes in addition.

PDC with optical warning

You can have the presence of an object indi-

cated on the control display. The contours of

distant objects are already shown on the control

display before an audible warning signal

sounds. The setting is stored for the remote

control currently in use.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "PDC" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Display on" and press the control-

ler.

 The PDC image is switched on.

The display is shown on the control display as

soon as PDC is activated.

System limitations

PDC is no substitute for your personal

assessment of obstructions. The sensors

have certain dead areas in which objects cannot

be detected. In addition, the identification of

objects may not be possible if the physical lim-

its of the ultrasonic measuring principle are

exceeded, for instance with trailer noses and

hitches, and thin or wedge-shaped objects.

Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,

may enter the sensors' dead areas before or

after a continuous audible signal is given.

Higher, protruding objects such as ledges maynot be detectable. Loud sound sources outside

or inside the car can drown out the PDC sig-

nal.<

Driving stability controlsystems

Your BMW has a number of systems that help

to maintain the vehicle's stability even in

adverse driving conditions.

Anti-lock Brake System ABS

ABS prevents the wheels from locking when

the brakes are applied. The car remains steera-

ble even under full braking. This increases

active safety.

ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is

started. Safe braking, see page 121.

Electronic Brake Force DistributionEBV

The system regulates the braking pressure on

the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking

behaviour.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 88: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 88/258

Page 89: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 89/258

 87

Activating DTC

Press the button; the indicator lights for DTC in

the instrument cluster come on.

As a check 

If the indicator light is flashing:

DTC is regulating the propulsive and

braking forces.

If the indicator lights are on:DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC

Press the button again; the DTC indicator lights

in the instrument cluster go out.

xDrive*

xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system.

xDrive and DSC interact with one another to fur-ther optimise traction and dynamic driving.

Depending on the driving situation and prevail-

ing road conditions, the xDrive four-wheel-drive

system distributes driving power variably to the

front and rear axles.

Hill Descent Control HDC*

HDC is a downhill driving assistant that regu-

lates your vehicle's speed on steep downhill

gradients and makes your BMW's handling

even easier to control under these conditions.

The vehicle then moves at slightly more than

double walking speed without you having to

intervene.

You can activate HDC below a speed of approx.

35 km/h, approx. 22 mph. When driving down-

hill at a speed below approx. 35 km/h, approx.

22 mph, the speed is then automatically

reduced to slightly more than double walking

speed and maintained.

Increasing or decreasing speed

You can vary the speed within a range of approx.

5 to 25 km/h, approx. 3 to 22 mph, by pressing

the accelerator pedal or the brake.

You can set a target speed in the same range

using the steering-column lever of the cruisecontrol*.

1 Increasing speed

2 Reducing speed

Activating HDC

Press the button; the indicator light comes on.

The indicator light flashes when the vehicle is

being braked automatically.

Deactivating HDC

Press the button again; the indicator light goesout.

HDC is automatically deactivated:

> At speeds above approx. 60 km/h, approx.

40 mph

> After the ignition is switched off.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 90: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 90/258

  T  e  c  h  n  i  c  a  l  f  e

  a  t  u  r  e  s  f  o  r  d  r  i  v  i  n  g  c  o  m  f  o  r  t  a  n  d  s  a  f  e  t  y

88

Using HDC

With manual gearbox:

Use HDC in low gears and in reverse gear.

With automatic gearbox:

You can use HDC in any drive position.

Displays in the instrument cluster*

1 Display for target speed

2 HDC indicator

Malfunction

If the HDC indicator goes out while HDC mode

is active or does not appear:

HDC is temporarily unavailable due to high

brake temperature, or DSC has failed.

Drive-off assistant with

6-cylinder enginesThe drive-off assistant enables you to drive off

smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary

to use the handbrake for this.

1. Hold the vehicle in place by depressing the

brake.

2. Release the brake and drive off without

delay.

The drive-off assistant holds the vehicle

in place for approx. 2 seconds after thebrake is released. Depending on the vehicle's

load or if towing a trailer, the vehicle may roll

backwards a little during this time. After releas-

ing the brake, drive off without delay. After

approx. 2 seconds, the drive-off assistant will

no longer hold the vehicle in place and the car

will start to roll backwards.<

Run Flat Indicator RPA

The principle

The Run Flat Indicator monitors the pressures

in the tyres while the car is being driven. The

system reports any significant loss of pressure

in one tyre in relation to another.

If a tyre loses pressure its rolling radius

changes, and this in turn alters the speed of

rotation. This alteration is detected and inter-

preted as a puncture.

Operating requirements

The system has to be initialised with all four

tyres inflated to the correct pressures in order

for it to respond reliably in detecting a puncture.

The system has to be reinitialised every

time tyre pressures are corrected, after

each change of a wheel or tyre, and after a trailer

has been attached or detached.<

System limitations

The Run Flat Indicator is unable to warn

the driver of sudden, severe tyre damage

caused by external factors, nor can it identify

the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably

occur in all four tyres over a lengthy period of

time.<

In the following situations, the system could be

slow to respond or operate incorrectly:

> System was not initialised

> Driving on snow-covered or slippery sur-

faces

> Sporty style of driving: high slip at the drive

wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Snow chains are fitted

Initialising the systemInitialisation is completed while the car is

on the move, but this can be interrupted

at any time. Initialisation resumes automatically

as soon as the car starts moving again.

Do not initialise the system while snow chains

are fitted.<

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 91: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 91/258

 89

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Flat Tyre Monitor" is selected andpress the controller.

6. Start the engine, but do not drive off yet.

7. Select "Confirm tyre pressure" and press

the controller.

8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

9. Drive off.

Initialisation is completed while the car is on

the move, without any feedback.

Indication of a flat tyre

The warning light shows red. A mes-

sage appears on the control display.

In addition, an acoustic signal is emit-

ted. There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre

pressure.

1. Carefully reduce your speed to no more

than 80 km/h or 50 mph. Avoid violent or

sudden braking and steering manoeuvres.

Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h or

50 mph after this.

If the car is not fitted with run-flat

tyres, see page 196, the standard

equipment by design, do not continue driv-

ing. Any attempt to drive on after a puncture

can result in a severe accident.<

2. Check the pressures in all four tyres at the

next opportunity.

If all four tyres are inflated to the cor-

rect pressures, the Run Flat Indicator

might not have been initialised. In this case

initialise the system.<

3. If a tyre is completely deflated, you can esti-

mate how far you will be able to drive using

the following guidelines:

> With low loads:

1 to 2 persons without luggage:

Approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles

> With moderate loads:

2 persons, luggage area full, or 4 per-

sons without luggage:

Approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles

> With a full load or while towing a trailer:

4 or more persons, luggage area full:

Approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles

Drive with caution and do not exceed

80 km/h or 50 mph. If there is a loss of tyre

pressure, the vehicle's handling properties willchange. These include reduced track stability

during braking, longer braking distances and

altered self-steering properties.

If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during

the journey, this may be an indication that the

damaged tyre has finally failed. Reduce your

speed and pull over to a suitable location as

soon as possible. Otherwise, parts of the tyre

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 92: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 92/258

  T  e  c  h  n  i  c  a  l  f  e

  a  t  u  r  e  s  f  o  r  d  r  i  v  i  n  g  c  o  m  f  o  r  t  a  n  d  s  a  f  e  t  y

90

may come loose, which could result in an acci-

dent. Do not drive the car any further; contact

BMW Service instead.<

Malfunction

The indicator light shows yellow. A

message appears on the control dis-

play. The Run Flat Indicator is mal-

functioning or has failed. Have the systemchecked as soon as possible.

Active steering*

The principle

Active steering varies the turning angle of the

front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-

ments. It also varies the steering force required

to turn the wheels, depending on the speed atwhich you are driving.

At lower speeds, e.g. in the city or while parking,

the turning angle is increased, i.e. smaller steer-

ing wheel movements and less effort are

required to turn the wheels. At higher speeds, in

contrast, the turning angle is increasingly

reduced. Your BMW's handling is thus

improved across all speed ranges.

In critical situations, the system can correct the

wheel turning angle resulting from the driver'ssteering and thus stabilise the vehicle before

the driver takes any action. This stabilising

intervention function is deactivated when DSC

is switched off, see page 86.

Malfunction

The warning lights come on. Active

steering is malfunctioning and deac-

tivated. At low speeds greater steer-

ing wheel movements are necessary,at high speeds the car reacts more sensitively

to steering wheel movements. The stabilising

intervention may also be deactivated. Drive

cautiously and think well ahead. Have the sys-

tem checked.

Two-stage brake lights*

On the left: normal braking

On the right: sharp braking while the rear foglights are off *.

Airbags

There are the following airbags beneath the

covers indicated:

1 Front airbags for driver and front passenger

2 Head airbags in the front and rear

3 Side airbags in the seat backrests

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 93: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 93/258

 91

Protective effect

Comply with the instructions on page 41,

or there will be greater risks to personal

safety.<

The front airbags protect the driver and front

passenger in the event of a head-on collision, if

the protective action of the seat belts alone

would be insufficient. The head-level and side

airbags provide protection in the event of a

side-on collision. The side airbag has the effect

of supporting the upper body from the side. The

head-level airbag supports the head of the

seat's occupant.

The airbags have been designed to not be trig-

gered off in every collision situation, e.g. not in

minor collisions or if the car is struck from the

rear.

Never attach any material to the airbag

covers with adhesive, place material overthem or modify them in any other way. Do not fit

seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe-

cifically approved for seats with integral side air-

bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of

clothing such as coats or jackets over the back-

rests. Do not dismantle the airbag occupant

restraint system. Do not modify the individual

components of the system or its wiring in any

way. This includes the upholstered covers on

the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats androof posts, as well as the sides of the roof lining.

Do not remove the steering wheel.

Avoid touching the system's components

immediately after it has been triggered off, as

there is a risk of sustaining burns.

If the airbag occupant restraint system malfunc-

tions, is to be decommissioned or has been trig-

gered, have it checked, repaired, dismantled

and the airbag generators scrapped only by

BMW Service or a workshop that operates to

BMW specifications and has appropriatelytrained personnel and the required permits for

handling explosives. Otherwise, work per-

formed incorrectly can lead to failure or inad-

vertent triggering of the system and to inju-

ries.<

Operational readiness of the airbagsystem

As of radio readiness, see page 55, the warning

light comes on briefly, indicating the operational

readiness of the entire airbag system and the

belt tensioners.

Airbag system faulty

> Warning light does not come on when radio

readiness or the ignition is switched on.

> Warning light remains lit.

In the event of a fault in the airbag system,

have it checked without delay, as there is

otherwise the risk that the system will not func-

tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe

accident occurs.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 94: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 94/258

  L  i  g  h  t  s

92

Lights

Side lights/low-beamheadlights

0 Lights off 

1 Side lights

2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights

3 Automatic driving lights control*, daytime

driving lights*, welcome lights, High-Beam

Assistant* and Adaptive Head Light*

If you open the driver's door with the ignition

switched off, the exterior lighting is switched off

automatically if the light switch is in position 0,

2, or 3.

If required, switch on the side lights, switch

position 1.

Side lights

When the switch is in position 1 the lights are on

all round the car. You can use the side lights for

parking.

With the ignition switched off, only the outer

chambers of the tail lights are lit up, see

page 208.

The side lights will discharge the battery.

Therefore, you should not leave them onfor longer periods of time, as otherwise the bat-

tery might not have enough power to start the

engine. It is preferable to switch on the right or

left parking lights, see page 94.<

Low-beam headlights

The low-beam headlights come on when the

light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is

switched on.

Automatic driving lights control*

When the switch is in position 3, the low-beam

headlights are switched on and off automati-

cally depending on ambient light conditions,

e.g. in a tunnel, twilight, and in precipitation.

Adaptive Head Light* is active. When the low-

beam headlights are on, the LED next to the

symbol is lit. You can also activate the daytime

driving lights, see page 93. In the above-men-

tioned situations, the system then switches

automatically from daytime driving lights to low-

beam headlights.

The headlights may also come on when the sun

is sitting low on a blue sky.

The low-beam headlights remain

switched on irrespective of the ambient

light conditions if you switch on the fog

lights*.<

The driving lights control function cannot

substitute for your personal judgement of

when it is necessary to switch on the lights. The

sensors are unable, for instance, to recognise

fog or hazy weather. To avoid any safety risk in

such situations, switch on the low-beam head-

lights manually.<

Welcome lights

If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 

when parking and switching off the vehicle, the

side lights and interior lights light up briefly

when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating the welcomelights

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 95: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 95/258

 93

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Light" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-

troller. The welcome lights are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Headlight courtesy delay feature

If you activate the headlight flasher after parking

the car, with the lights switched off, the low-

beam headlights come on and remain on for a

certain time.

You can adjust the operating period or deacti-

vate the function.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Light" and press the controller.

6. Select "Home lights" and press the control-

ler.

7. Turn the controller to set the appropriate

duration.

8. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Daytime driving lights

The daytime driving lights light up in switch

position 3.

Activating/deactivating daytimedriving lights*

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. Select "Light" and press the controller.

6. Select "Daytime running lights" and press

the controller.

 Daytime driving lights are switched on.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 96: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 96/258

  L  i  g  h  t  s

94

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Adaptive Head Light*

The principle

Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlight con-

trol system that optimises the illumination ofthe road ahead as the car corners. The light

cones from the headlights are directed to suit

the road ahead on the basis of steering angle

and other parameters.

Activating Adaptive Head Light

With the ignition switched on, turn the light

switch to position 3, see page 92.

To avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehi-

cles, Adaptive Head Light is not active when thecar is reversing and directs the light to the front

passenger's side when the vehicle is at a stand-

still.

Malfunction

The LED next to the symbol for automatic driv-

ing lights control flashes. Adaptive Head Light

is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system

checked as soon as possible.

Headlight beam throwadjustment

Halogen headlights

The beam throw of the low-beam headlights

must be adjusted manually to suit the load car-

ried in the car, otherwise the drivers of oncom-

ing vehicles could be dazzled:

The second value in each case applies when

towing a trailer.

0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage

1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage

1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage

22 = 1 person, luggage area full

Comply with rear axle load limit, see page 222.

Xenon headlights*

The headlight beam throw is regulated auto-

matically, e.g. when accelerating and braking

and to adapt to various loads being carried.

High-beam headlights/parking lights

1 High-beam headlights

2 Headlight flasher

3 Parking lights*

Right or left parking lights*

There is an additional option of switching on the

lights on the side of the car facing the road

when parked.

Switching on

After parking the car, press the lever up or down

beyond the pressure point for a longer period,

arrow 3.

The parking lights will discharge the bat-

tery. Therefore, you should not leave

them on for longer periods of time, as otherwise

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 97: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 97/258

Page 98: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 98/258

  L  i  g  h  t  s

96

Switching off via iDrive

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Light" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "High-beam assistant" and press

the controller.

 The High-Beam Assistant is switched

off.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Fog lights

1 Fog lights*

2 Rear fog lights*

To switch on or off, press the respective button.

Fog lights*

The side lights or low-beam headlights must be

switched on. The green indicator light in the

instrument cluster comes on when the fog

lights are in use.

If automatic driving lights control has

been activated, the low-beam headlights

come on automatically when the front fog lights

are switched on.<

Rear fog lights*

The low-beam headlights or side lights with fog

lights must be switched on. The yellow indica-

tor light in the instrument cluster comes on

when the rear fog lights are in use.

Instrument lighting

You can adjust the brightness of the instrument

lighting only when the side lights or the low-

beam headlights are switched on.

1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until

the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-

play, accompanied by the brightness set-

ting and the word "SET".

2. Press button 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 99: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 99/258

 97

3. Press button 1 up or down to select the

desired brightness.

4. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.

The display again shows the outside tem-

perature and the time.

Interior lights

The interior lights, the footwell lights*, the doorentry lighting*, the luggage area light and the

ground lights* are controlled automatically.

The LEDs for the ground lights are set in the

door handles and illuminate the ground in front

of the doors.

To protect the battery, all lights inside the

car are switched off about 8 minutes after

the ignition is switched off, see Start/stop but-

ton on page 55.<

Switching interior lights on/offmanually

Interior lights, front and rear*:

To switch on and off, press the button.

If the interior lights, footwell lights*, door entry

lighting* and ground lights* are to remain off

permanently, press the button of the front inte-

rior light for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lights

There are reading lights at the front and rear*,

next to the interior lights. To switch on and off,

press the button.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 100: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 100/258

  C  l  i  m  a  t  e

98

Climate

1 Air to windscreen and side windows

2 Air to the upper body area

Draught-free ventilation 101

3 Air to the footwell

4 Manual air distribution

5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of

passenger compartment

6 Maximum cooling

7 AUTO program

8 Manual air flow control

9 Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/

recirculated-air mode

10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side

of passenger compartment

11 Residual heat

12 Defrosting windows

13 Switching cooling function on/off manually

14 Rear window heating

15 Air inlet grille for interior temperature sen-

sor, keep unobstructed

The current setting for the air distribution is dis-

played on the control display, see page 99.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 101: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 101/258

Page 102: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 102/258

  C  l  i  m  a  t  e

100

In the lowest setting, there is continuous cool-

ing.

Maximum cooling

At outside temperatures above

06/327 and when the engine is

running, you obtain a maximum

cooling effect as soon as possible.

The automatic air-conditioning system

switches to the lowest temperature and oper-

ates in recirculated-air mode. Air flows at maxi-

mum rate only from the outlets for the upper

body area. You should therefore open these

outlets for maximum cooling.

AUTO program

The AUTO program adjusts the air

distribution to the windscreen and

side windows, towards the upperbody area and into the footwell for you. The air

flow and your temperature specifications will be

adapted to outside influences as a result of sea-

sonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window mist.

The cooling function is switched on automati-

cally in the AUTO program.

Intensity of the AUTO program

You can set the intensity of the air supply in the

AUTO program. This changes the duration oftime during which the vehicle interior is heated

or cooled.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the

controller.

4. Select the desired intensity and press the

controller.

 The selected intensity level of the auto-

matic program is switched on.

Adjusting air flow manually

Press the left side of the button to

reduce air flow. Press the right side

of the button to increase it.

You can switch the automatic air flow control

back on by pressing the AUTO button.

Switching the system on/off 

With the blower at its lowest setting, press the

left side of the button to switch off the auto-

matic air-conditioning system. All indicators go

out.

Press any button except REST to reactivate the

automatic air-conditioning system.

Automatic Air Recirculation ControlAUC/recirculated-air mode

Activate the desired operating

mode by pressing this button

repeatedly:

> LED off: outside air is constantly entering

the car.

> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensordetects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-

essary, the system blocks the supply of out-

side air and recirculates the inside air. As

soon as the concentration of pollutants in

the outside air has decreased sufficiently,

the system automatically switches back to

outside air supply.

> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:

outside air supply is shut off permanently.

The air inside the car is recirculated.

If the windows fog over in the recircu-

lated-air mode, switch it off and, if neces-

sary, increase the air flow rate.

The recirculated-air mode should not be used

continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality

of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually

deteriorate.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 103: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 103/258

 101

Via a button* on the steering wheel

You can switch quickly between recirculated-air

mode and the previous mode using an individu-

ally programmable button on the steering

wheel, see page 9.

Residual heat

The heat stored in the engine is

used to heat the car's interior, for

instance when waiting at a school

to pick up a child.

The function can be switched on whenever the

following conditions are met:

> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been

switched off 

> The engine is at operating temperature

> Battery voltage is sufficient

> The outside temperature is below 25 6/777

The LED lights up when the function is

switched on.

As of radio readiness, you can adjust the interior

temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-

bution.

Defrosting windows

Quickly removes ice and conden-

sation from the windscreen and

the front side windows.

To do so, also switch on the cooling function.

Switching cooling function on/off 

When the cooling function is on, air

is cooled and dried, then reheated

according to the temperature set-

ting. Depending on weather conditions, the

windscreen may fog over momentarily when

the engine is started.The cooling function is switched on automati-

cally with the AUTO program. The passenger

compartment can only be cooled if the engine is

running.

Rear window heating

The heater is switched off auto-

matically after a certain time.

Depending on the equipment ver-

sion, upper wires are used as an aerial and are

not part of the rear window heating.

Ventilation

1 Knurled wheels to open and close the air

outlets continuously

2 Levers for changing the direction of the air-

flow

3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air via

the air outlets for the upper body

Ventilation for cooling

Adjust the outlets so that cool air is directed

towards you, e.g. if the car's interior has

become hot.

Draught-free ventilation

Adjust the outlets so that the airflow passes the

occupants without striking their bodies directly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 104: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 104/258

  C  l  i  m  a  t  e

102

Ventilation in the rear

1 Knurled wheel to open and close the air out-

lets continuously

2 Knurled wheel to adjust the temperature:

> Turn towards blue: cooler

> Turn towards red: warmer

3 Levers for changing the direction of the air-

flow

Micro-filter/activated charcoal filter

The micro-filter traps dust and pollen in the

incoming air. The activated charcoal filter in

addition removes gaseous pollutants from the

air entering the car. This combined filter is

changed by BMW Service during routine main-

tenance work.

Independent ventilation/heating system*

The principle

The independent ventilation system ventilates

the passenger compartment and lowers its

temperature under some circumstances.

The independent heating system warms up the

passenger compartment; snow and ice can be

removed more easily.

Two different switch-on times can be pre-

selected. The systems can also be switched on

or off directly or via the remote control. They

remain switched on for 30 minutes.

Due to their high power consumption, you

should not switch on the systems twice in a row

without first letting the battery recharge while

the vehicle is being driven.

Both systems are operated via iDrive or the

remote control, see page 104.

Independent ventilation system

The independent ventilation system is

switched on, either with the remote control or at

a pre-selected switch-on time, above an out-

side temperature of approx. 156/597. If

operated directly, the independent ventilationsystem can be used at any outside tempera-

ture, but not while the vehicle is being driven. If

no independent heating system is fitted, the

independent ventilation system is operational

at a pre-selected switch-on time at any outside

temperature.

The air emerges through the outlets for the

upper body area in the dashboard. The outlets

must therefore be open.

Independent heating system

The independent heating system is switched

on, either with the remote control or using a

pre-selected switch-on time, under an outside

temperature of approx. 156/597. If operated

directly, the independent heating system can

be used at any outside temperature, but not

while the vehicle is being driven.

If you have not used the independent

heating system for several months, it maybe necessary to switch the system on again

after a few minutes for the independent heating

system to start up.<

While the ignition is switched off, the warmed

air is directed automatically to the windscreen,

the side windows and the footwell.

As of radio readiness, you can adjust the interior

temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-

bution.

The independent heating system continues torun for a short while after being switched off.

The symbol on the display of the automatic

air-conditioning system goes out.

Never operate the independent heating

system in enclosed spaces, as inhaling

the harmful exhaust gas can lead to loss of con-

sciousness with fatal consequences. The

exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 105: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 105/258

 103

is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.

Switch off the independent heating system

while refuelling.<

The independent heating system will not

come on if the amount of fuel remaining in

the tank lasts for fewer than approx. 50 km,

approx. 30 miles of driving. The independent

heating system switches off if the exhaust pipe

under the front bumper is obstructed, e.g. whenyou drive forwards into a pile of snow. This can

result in the formation of smoke.<

Switching on/off directly

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Independent mode" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Direct operation" and press the

controller.

5. Select "Independent heater" or "Independ-

ent ventilation" and press the controller.

 The independent ventilation/heating sys-

tem is switched on.

 The symbol on the display of the automatic

air-conditioning system flashes.

Pre-selecting switch-on timesiDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Call up start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-

mate".

3. Select "Independent mode" and press the

controller.

4. Select "Switch-on times" and press the

controller.

5. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

6. Select the time and press the controller.

The first part of the time setting is selected.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

8. Press the controller to adopt the setting.

The next part of the setting is selected.

9. Complete the setting. Once the setting has

been completed, the time is memorised.

Activating the switch-on time

Move the controller to the left or right to select

"Timer 1" or "Timer 2", and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 106: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 106/258

  C  l  i  m  a  t  e

104

 The switch-on time is activated.

 The symbol on the display of the automatic

air-conditioning system lights up.

 The symbol on the display of the automatic

air-conditioning system flashes when the sys-

tem has switched on.

The relevant system is switched on within

the next 24 hours only. Afterward, it must

be reactivated.<

Remote control*

1 Switching off 

2 Switching on

3 LED

4 Aerial

The reception-dependent average range is

approx. 150 m, approx. 165 yd.

The range is best when you hold the

remote control as high as possible with

the aerial pointing up. When switching on and

off, do not touch the aerial.<

Switching on

1. Press button 2 until LED 3 lights up in

green.

2. Within approx. 3 seconds, press button 2 

again. The LED 3 flashes in green.

 The symbol on the display of the automaticair-conditioning system flashes.

Switching off 

1. Press button 1 until LED 3 lights up in red.

2. Within approx. 3 seconds, press button 1 

again. The LED 3 flashes in red.

 The symbol on the display of the automatic

air-conditioning system goes out.

Identical frequencies

The remote control can malfunction due to

nearby external systems or devices using the

same frequency.

Replacing batteriesReplace the batteries if the LED no longer lights

up or flashes when the independent ventilation

or heating system is switched on.

1. Remove the cover for the battery compart-

ment, see arrow.

2. Insert batteries of the same type. The

proper orientation of the batteries is shown

on the bottom of the battery compartment.

3. Attach the cover.

Dispose of old batteries only at an author-ised collecting point or hand them in to

BMW Service.<

New remote control

Should you wish to use a new remote control as

an additional remote control or as a replace-

ment for a lost remote control, your BMW Serv-

ice will be glad to initialise it for you.

You can use two remote controls for your vehi-

cle.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 107: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 107/258

 105

Practical interior equipment

Integrated universal remotecontrol*

The principle

The integrated universal remote controlreplaces up to three different hand-held trans-

mitters for various systems or devices that are

operated by radio remote control, for example a

garage or gate opener or lighting systems. The

integrated universal remote control identifies

and learns the signals transmitted by the origi-

nal hand-held transmitters.

The signal from an original hand-held transmit-

ter can be programmed to one of the three

memory buttons 1. After this, the programmedmemory button 1 will operate the system in

question. Transmission of the signal is shown

by the LED 2.

If and when you decide to sell your car, in the

interests of security clear the programmed

functions, see page 106.

During the programming operation and

before a programmed system is operated

with the integrated universal remote control,

make sure that no persons, animals or objectsare within the pivoting or movement range of

the system in question, as otherwise injury or

damage could result. Comply also with the

safety instructions supplied with the original

hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibility

If this symbol appears on the pack or in

the instructions supplied with the origi-

nal hand-held transmitter, you can

assume that the radio remote control device will

be compatible with the integrated universal

remote control.

A list of compatible hand-held transmitters can

be found on the Internet at

www.eurohomelink.com. You can also call the

toll-free HomeLink Hotline under

0800 0466 35465 or alternatively under

+49 (0)6838 907 277 in Germany.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson

Controls, Inc.

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitter

1. Switch on the ignition, see page 55.

2. When using for the first time: press the left-

hand and right-hand memory button 1 for

approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes.

The three memory buttons are cleared.

3. Point the original hand-held transmitter at

memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx.

10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.

The required distance between the

hand-held transmitter and memory

buttons 1 depends on the system accord-

ing to which the original hand-held trans-

mitter operates.<

4. Press the command button on the original

hand-held transmitter and the desired

memory button 1 on the integrated univer-

sal remote control at the same time. The

LED 2 initially flashes slowly. When the

LED 2 starts to flash rapidly, release both

buttons. If the LED 2 does not start to flash

rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, change

the distance and repeat the step.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 108: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 108/258

  P  r  a  c  t  i  c  a  l  i  n  t  e  r  i  o  r  e

  q  u  i  p  m  e  n  t

106

5. To program additional original hand-held

transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now

programmed with the same signal as the origi-

nal hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device while the ignition is

switched on.

If the device fails to function even afterrepeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-

nating-code system. To establish this, either

consult the operating instructions for the origi-

nal hand-held transmitter or press the pro-

grammed memory button 1 on the integrated

universal remote control for a longer period. If

the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote

control flashes rapidly for a short while and then

remains lit for about two seconds, the original

hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-codesystem. If it uses an alternating-code system,

program the memory buttons 1 as described

under Alternating-code hand-held transmit-

ter.<

Alternating-code hand-heldtransmitter

To program the integrated universal remote

control, consult the operating instructions for

the device to be operated. The instructionsshould indicate what scope there is for synchro-

nisation.

When programming an alternating-code hand-

held transmitter, the following additional points

should be noted:

Programming will be easier if another per-

son is available to assist you.<

1. Park your car within the range of the radio

remote control device.

2. Program the integrated universal remotecontrol as described above under Fixed-

code hand-held transmitter.

3. Establish the location of the button on the

receiver of the device to be operated, e.g.

on the drive system.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the

device to be operated. Once step 4 has

been performed, step 5 must be completed

within about 30 seconds.

5. Press programmed memory button 1 on

the integrated universal remote control

three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now

programmed with the same signal as the origi-

nal hand-held transmitter.

If you have any queries, please contact

your BMW Service centre.<

Deleting all stored programs

Press the left-hand and right-hand memory

button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 

flashes rapidly. All memorised programs are

deleted.

Reassigning individual programs

1. Point the original hand-held transmitter at

memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx.

10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.

The required distance between the

hand-held transmitter and memory

buttons 1 depends on the system of the

particular original hand-held transmitter.<

2. Press the desired memory button 1 on the

integrated universal remote control.

3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.20 seconds, press the command button of

the original hand-held transmitter. When

the LED 2 starts to flash rapidly, release

both buttons. If the LED 2 does not start to

flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds,

change the distance and repeat the step.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 109: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 109/258

 107

Digital compass*

1 Adjustment button

2 Display

The display shows you the cardinal or interme-

diate compass direction in which you are driv-

ing.

Operating principle

You can call up various functions by pressing

the adjustment button with a pointed object

such as a pen or similar item. The following

adjustment options are displayed one after the

other, depending on how long you keep the

adjustment button pressed:

> Press briefly: switch display on/off 

> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass

> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand

steering

> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language

Setting compass zones

Set the compass zone corresponding to your

vehicle's geographic location, so that the com-

pass can function correctly; see the world map

with compass zones below.

To set the compass zone, press the adjustment

button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of

the compass zone set is shown in the display.

To change the zone setting, briefly press the

adjustment button repeatedly until the display

shows the number of the compass zone corre-

sponding to your current location.

The compass is operational again after approx.

10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the

following situations:

> An incorrect compass direction is shown.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 110: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 110/258

  P  r  a  c  t  i  c  a  l  i  n  t  e  r  i  o  r  e

  q  u  i  p  m  e  n  t

108

> The compass direction shown does not

change although the direction of travel

does.

> Not all compass directions are displayed.

Procedure

1. Make sure that no large metal objects or

overhead power lines are near your vehicle

and that you have enough space to drive in a

circle.

2. Set the correct compass zone for your cur-

rent location.

3. Press the adjustment button for approx.

6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive at least

one full circle at a speed of no more than

7 km/h or 4 mph.

If calibration was successful, the display

changes from C to a compass direction.

Setting right-hand/left-hand steering

Your digital compass is factory-set to right-

hand or left-hand steering in accordance with

your vehicle.

Setting the language

You can set the language of the display:

Press the adjustment button for approx.

12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment

button again to switch between English, "E",

and German, "O".

The setting is automatically saved after approx.

10 seconds.

Roller sunblinds*

Roller sunblind for rear window

Tap the button in the centre console to raise or

lower the roller sunblind.

Roller sunblinds for rear side windows

Pull the loop on the roller sunblind and hook it

into the mounting.

Glove box

Opening

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove box comes on.

After using the glove box while the car is

moving, close its lid without delay, so that

it cannot cause injury in the event of an acci-

dent.<

Closing

Swing lid up.

Locking

To lock the glove box, use the integrated key of

the remote control, see page 26.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 111: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 111/258

 109

Rechargeable hand lamp*

The rechargeable hand lamp is located on the

left-hand side of the glove box. It can remain

plugged in. Whenever required, pull the lamp

out of the socket.

Only insert the lamp into the socket when

it is switched off, otherwise there is a risk

of damage.<

Centre armrest

Storage compartment

Depending on the version, the centre armrest

between the front seats contains either a com-

partment or the cover for the snap-in adapter*.

For more details on this mobile phone provi-

sion, see the separate Operating Instructions.

Opening

Press the button, see arrow.

Ventilated storage compartment

The storage compartment in the centre armrest

can be ventilated: push the switch toward the

rear.

The temperature can be adjusted using the

knurled wheel for rear-ventilation temperature

control, see page 102.

Connection for external audio device

You can connect an external audio device such

as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks

over the car's loudspeaker system.

> AUX-IN port, see page 183

> USB/audio interface*, see page 184

Storage compartments in thepassenger compartment

Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-

sion, storage compartments are next to the

steering column*, on the front doors and in the

centre console*.

There are nets* on the front-seat backrests.

Coat hooks

There are coat hooks on the grab handles in the

rear seating area.

Items of clothing hung from the hooks

must not obstruct the driver's view. Do

not hang heavy objects from the hooks, as they

could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in

case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 112: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 112/258

  P  r  a  c  t  i  c  a  l  i  n  t  e  r  i  o  r  e

  q  u  i  p  m  e  n  t

110

Drinks holders*

Use light-weight and breakproof contain-

ers and do not transport hot beverages.

Otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in

the event of an accident. Do not force contain-

ers that are too large into the drinks holders;

otherwise damage could result.<

Front

Opening

Briefly press the centre of the cover.

Closing

Press the centre of the cover and push in the

drinks holder.

Front ashtray*

Opening

Push the projection on the cover.

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Lighter

With the engine running or the ignition switched

on, press in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be pulled out when it

pops back out.

Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its

knob, otherwise you may suffer burns.When leaving the car, always remove the

remote control so that children cannot operate

the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 113: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 113/258

 111

Rear ashtray*

Opening

Push the projection on the cover.

Emptying

Lift out the insert.

Connecting electricalappliances

In your BMW, you can use electrical devices

such as a hand lamp, car vacuum cleaner, etc.,

up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts if at least one

of the following sockets is provided. Do not

damage the sockets by attempting to insert

plugs of the wrong pattern.

Cigarette lighter socket*Access to the socket: pull the cigarette lighter

out of the socket.

Socket in the centre armrest

External audio device, see page 109.

Sockets in the rear centre console*

Remove the respective cover.

Socket in the luggage area*

Saloon

Touring

Open the cap.

Saloon: through-loadingsystem*

Opening

1. Open the belt lock of the rear centre seat

belt. To do so, press the button, see arrow,

and release the seat belt tongue.

2. Insert the seat belt tongue at the end of the

belt into the specially designated mounting

on the rear parcel shelf.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 114: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 114/258

  P  r  a  c  t  i  c  a  l  i  n  t  e  r  i  o  r  e

  q  u  i  p  m  e  n  t

112

3. Push the relevant head restraint all the way

down, see page 44.

4. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the

corresponding lever in the luggage area.

5. The released rear seat backrest moves for-

ward slightly. Fold the backrest forwards by

pushing the head restraint.

Fastening

1. Fold the rear seat backrest back into the

position for sitting and engage it.When returning the rear seat backrest

into the position for sitting, make sure

that the seat's locking mechanism engages

properly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown

about in the event of sharp braking or eva-

sive manoeuvres and endanger the occu-

pants.<

2. Release the seat belt tongue from the

mounting on the rear parcel shelf and insert

it into the belt lock of the centre seat belt.

The seat belt tongue must be heard to

engage.

There are lashing eyes in the luggage area to

which luggage area nets* or retaining straps

can be attached when loads have to be secured,

see page 123.

Touring:Luggage area

Make sure that no fluids are leaking in the

luggage area. Otherwise the vehicle could

be damaged.<

Roller-blind cover

Pull out the cover and hook it into the holders.

Do not place any objects on the cover, asthey could endanger the car's occupants,

e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-

ing.

Do not allow the cover to be retracted in an

uncontrolled manner, as otherwise it could be

damaged.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 115: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 115/258

Page 116: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 116/258

  P  r  a  c  t  i  c  a  l  i  n  t  e  r  i  o  r  e

  q  u  i  p  m  e  n  t

114

Storage compartments in theluggage area

Saloon

Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-

sion, there are the following storage options in

the luggage area:

> Left storage compartment, e.g. for stowinga box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD

 jackets, depending on vehicle equipment

version

> Net* for securing small objects, to be

attached to the mountings of the floor panel

> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags

or tote bags

> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for

securing small objects such as a folding

umbrella> Net for small objects on the right side trim

panel of the luggage area

> Retaining straps next to the rear lashing

eyes, e.g. for securing an umbrella

> Folding, removable box* under the floor

panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items

> Storage compartment under the floor panel

> Insertable dividers* and removable storage

tray for the storage compartment under thefloor panel

> Drawer for stowing small items. To release

it, pull the handle firmly. If required, you can

take the drawer fully out, see below

Do not drive or close the luggage com-

partment lid when the drawer is pulled

out.

On uphill gradients, release the drawer care-

fully, as otherwise it could slide out suddenly on

its own and cause injury.Do not exceed a maximum load of 5 kg/11 lbs

for the drawer, as otherwise damage could

result.<

Removing the drawer

1. Push the drawer all the way in.

2. Turn the catches on the left and right all the

way out.

3. Take out the drawer by pulling it down and

backwards.

Refitting the drawer

1. Hook the guides of the drawer into the frontof the yellow fixtures on the bottom of the

luggage area.

2. Insert the catches into the supports on the

bottom of the luggage area.

3. Turn the catches on the left and right all the

way in.

Touring

The following storage options are available in

the luggage area:

> Umbrella holder underneath the casing for

the partition net

> Rubber straps on the left and right side trim

panels for securing small objects such as a

folding umbrella

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 117: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 117/258

 115

> Hooks for hanging up shopping bags or tote

bags, for example, on the left and right sides

of the luggage area

> Net for small objects on the right side trim

panel of the luggage area

> Storage compartment under the floor panel

Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-

sion, there are additional storage options in theluggage area:

> Net* for securing small objects, to be

attached to the mountings of the floor panel

> Net* on the left side trim panel of the lug-

gage area instead of the rubber strap

> Versatile raised floor panel with integrated

protective tarp* for luggage area or bumper

> Folding, removable box* under the floor

panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items

> Insertable dividers* and removable storage

tray for the storage compartment under the

floor panel

Folding up the floor panel

Do not exceed the maximum permissible

load of 25 kg or 55 lbs for the storage

compartment under the floor panel, as other-

wise damage could result.<

Saloon

Push it up to the ceiling of the luggage area; a

catch holds the floor panel in place. To remove,

pull the floor panel out of the catch.

Specification with drawer:

Take the retaining strap on the right-hand side

of the drawer out of the holder and use it to lock

the floor panel in place.

Touring

Fold up the floor panel and remove it or lean it

forwards.

Lashing eyes

There are lashing eyes in the luggage area for

securing luggage items with nets or tensioning

straps, see page 123.

Ski bag*

The ski bag facilitates the safe and clean trans-

port of up to four pairs of standard skis or up to

two snowboards.

You can stow skis up to a length of 2.10 m,

approx. 6 ft 10 in, with the aid of the ski bag. If

skis of this length are carried, however, the

capacity of the ski bag is lower in view of itstapered design.

Loading

1. Fold down the centre armrest.

2. Press the button, reach into the recess and

fold down the hinged cover.

3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski

bag between the front seats and insert the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 118: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 118/258

  P  r  a  c  t  i  c  a  l  i  n  t  e  r  i  o  r  e

  q  u  i  p  m  e  n  t

116

skis or snowboards.

The zip fastener makes objects in the ski

bag easier to reach.

4. Insert the tongue of the ski bag's retaining

strap in the centre belt buckle.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap pro-

tective material around sharp edges to prevent

damage.

Securing the load

After loading the ski bag, secure the bag and its

contents by tightening the retaining strap at its

turnbuckle.

Secure the ski bag in the manner

described, as it could endanger the car's

occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sud-

den swerving.<

To stow away the ski bag, follow the opposite

procedure as for loading.

Removing the ski bag

You can remove the ski bag for quick drying, for

example, or if you want to use other fittings.

1. Fold down the centre panel in the rear-seat

backrest.

2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.

3. Take out the fitting, arrow 2.

For more information on the various fit-

tings available, contact BMW Service.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 119: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 119/258

 117

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 120: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 120/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 121: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 121/258

Driving hintsHere is a variety of informatio

that you may need in particu

driving situations or operating mode

Driving hints

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 122: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 122/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g  p  r

  e  c  a  u  t  i  o  n  s

120

Driving precautions

Running in

Moving parts require some time before they can

interact smoothly with one another. Please

comply with the following instructions, which

are intended to ensure that your car achieves itsoptimum operating life and economy.

Engine and final drive

Observe the national speed limits in the country

in which you are travelling.

Up to 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles

Drive at varying road and engine speeds, but do

not exceed the following values:

> Petrol engine

4500 rpm, or 160 km/h or 100 mph

> Diesel engine

3500 rpm, or 150 km/h or 90 mph

Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic

gearbox kick-down.

From 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles,onwards

Engine and road speeds can be graduallyincreased.

Tyres

New tyres do not achieve their full road

grip immediately, for production reasons. You

should therefore drive in a restrained manner

for the first 300 km, approx. 200 miles.

Brakes

Brake pads and discs do not achieve a favoura-

ble wear and contact pattern until the car has

covered about 500 km, approx. 300 miles. Drive

with caution during this running-in period.

Clutch

The clutch needs to be run in for about 500 km,

approx. 300 miles, before it will operate with

maximum efficiency. Operate the clutch gently

while running it in.

After fitting new parts

The same running-in procedures should beobserved if any of the components mentioned

above have to be renewed in the course of the

vehicle's operating life.

General driving notes

Closing the luggage compartment lid/tailgate

Drive only with the luggage compartment

lid/tailgate and rear window closed, other-

wise exhaust gases could enter the passenger

compartment.<

If it is nevertheless necessary to travel with the

luggage compartment lid/tailgate or rear win-

dow open, observe the following precautions:

1. Close all the windows and the glass roof.

2. Turn the air flow rate of the automatic air-

conditioning system well up, see page 100.

Hot exhaust system

High temperatures in the exhaust system

occur with all vehicles. Never remove the

heat shields protecting the exhaust system, nor

apply underseal to them. Make sure that when

the car is driven or parked and when the engine

is idling, no easily flammable material such as

hay, leaves, grass, etc. comes into contact with

the hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a

fire, with the risk of severe injuries or damage.

Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise

there is a risk of burns.<

Diesel particle filter*

The diesel particle filter collects soot particles

and burns them periodically at high tempera-

tures. This cleaning procedure takes several

minutes. Under some circumstances, you may

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 123: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 123/258

 121

notice it by the fact that the engine temporarily

runs more roughly and requires a higher engine

speed for normal power development. In addi-

tion, the exhaust may cause some noise and

emit a small amount of smoke, even after the

engine has been switched off.

Mobile communication equipment

BMW advises against the use of mobilecommunication devices such as mobile

phones inside the car, unless they are directly

connected to an outside aerial. Mutual interfer-

ence between the vehicle's electronics and

such devices cannot be entirely ruled out.

Moreover, there is no guarantee that the radia-

tion generated when such devices are transmit-

ting will be dissipated out of the vehicle's inte-

rior.<

Climatic comfort windscreen*

Use the area marked in the illustration for your

garage-door opener, electronic devices for toll

logging, or similar. This area does not have an

infrared-reflective coating and is clearly distin-

guishable from inside the car.

Aquaplaning

When driving on wet or slushy surfaces,

reduce speed to prevent a wedge of water

from forming between the tyre and the road.

This situation, known as aquaplaning, means

that the tyre can actually lose contact com-

pletely with the road surface, so that neither the

car can be steered nor the brake be properly

applied.<

The risk of aquaplaning increases with declin-

ing tread depth on the tyres, see also Minimum

tread depth on page 195.

Driving through water

Drive through water only to a max. depth

of 30 cm, approx. 1 ft, and no faster than

walking pace, otherwise the engine, electrical

system and gearbox may be damaged.<

Apply the handbrake on uphillgradients

Never try to prevent the car from rolling

back on an uphill gradient by slipping the

clutch; always apply the handbrake. The clutch

will otherwise wear rapidly.<

In vehicles with 6-cylinder engines, the drive-off

assistant offers additional help, see page 88.

Safe braking

Your BMW is equipped with ABS as standard.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective

way of braking in situations in which this isnecessary. Since the car remains steerable, you

can avoid obstacles by turning the steering

wheel as smoothly as possible.

The pulsating sensation at the brake pedal,

combined with the sound of the hydraulic sys-

tem operating, indicates that ABS is interven-

ing.

Wet roads

In damp weather or heavy rain, apply the brakesbriefly with light pedal pressure every few kilo-

metres/miles. When doing so, make sure that

no other road user is hindered. The resulting

heat dries the brake discs and pads. The brak-

ing force will then be available immediately if

needed.

Downhill gradients

To avoid impairing the efficiency of the

brake system as a result of overheating,drive down long or steep descents in the gear

that allows you to keep brake applications to a

minimum. Otherwise even slight, continuous

pressure on the brake could cause overheating,

brake pad wear or even brake system failure.<

You can increase the engine's braking effect by

shifting down through the gears all the way to

first gear, if necessary. This avoids overburden-

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 124: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 124/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g  p  r

  e  c  a  u  t  i  o  n  s

122

ing the brakes. Downshifting in manual mode of

the automatic gearbox, see page 59.

Never drive with the clutch held down,

with the gearbox in neutral or with the

engine switched off; engine braking action will

not be present, or there will be no power assist-

ance to the brakes or steering.

Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired

by floor mats, carpets or other objects.<

Corrosion of brake discs

If the car is used for short distances only, is

parked for lengthy periods or subjected to only

minor loads, the brake discs will be particularly

susceptible to corrosion and the brake pads will

collect dirt; this is because the brake pressure

necessary for a self-cleaning effect is not gen-

erated.

When the brakes are applied, corroded discstend to judder, and even lengthy brake applica-

tions usually fail to eliminate this effect entirely.

Car parked

Moisture condensate forms in the automatic

air-conditioning system and is discharged

underneath the car. Traces of water on the

ground are therefore normal.

Before entering a car washGeneral information about care of your BMW is

provided in the booklet Looking after your car.

Touring: rear window wiper

In automatic car washes, there is a risk of dam-

age to the rear window wiper. If necessary, ask

the car wash operator about appropriate pro-

tection measures.

With convenient access and automaticgearbox

Insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off with the selec-

tor lever in position N. See also page 35.

Rule of the road

When entering countries where the traffic

drives on the opposite side of the road to the

country in which your car is registered, certain

measures are necessary to avoid dazzling the

drivers of oncoming vehicles.

BMW Service is able to supply masking film.

Note the instructions enclosed with the filmwhen applying.

Load

Avoid overloading the car, as this could

cause the tyres' carrying capacity to be

exceeded. The tyres could then overheat and

sustain internal damage. This could lead to sud-

den pressure loss.<

Loading

> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-

ward as possible, ideally directly behind the

respective seat backs.

> Wrap protective material round sharp cor-

ners and edges.

> When carrying very heavy loads with no

passengers on the back seat, insert both

outer seat belts into the respective opposite

buckles.

Saloon

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 125: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 125/258

 123

Touring

> Use the partition net to protect passengers,

see page 113. Make sure that objects can-

not poke through the partition net.

> Do not stack items higher than the top edge

of the seat backs.

> Wrap appropriate protective material

around objects that could strike the rear

window while the car is on the move.

Securing the load

> Small and relatively light items can be

retained with tensioning straps, a luggage

area net* or other suitable straps*.

> BMW Service can supply suitable lashings* 

for securing larger or heavier loads. Four

lashing eyes are provided for attaching the

lashing equipment. Two are located on the

luggage-area side walls 1, two more are on

the rear luggage-area panel 2.

Please comply with the information pro-

vided with the lashing equipment.

Always stow and secure the load as

described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden

braking or avoiding action is necessary.

Do not exceed the car's permitted gross weight

or the axle load limits, see page 222, otherwise

the car's operating safety may be endangered

and the construction and use regulations

infringed.

Heavy or hard objects should not be carried

loose inside the car, since they could be dis-

lodged, for example by heavy braking, sudden

avoiding action or similar, and endanger the

occupants.<

Roof rack*

A special roof rack system is available as an

accessory for your BMW. Please observe the

directions contained in the installation instruc-

tions.

Mounting points

The mounting points are located on the roof/on

the roof rails*.

Loading the roof rack 

A loaded roof rack alters the car's road behav-

iour and steering response quite considerably,

by moving its centre of gravity.

When loading the roof rack, ensure that the

specified roof load limit, the car's gross weight

limit and the axle loads are not exceeded.

The relevant figures are shown in the Weights

section on page 222.

The roof load must be distributed uniformly and

should not be too large in area. Heavy items

should always be placed at the bottom. Make

sure that there is sufficient clearance for raising

the glass roof and that no objects extend back

into the movement range of the luggage com-

partment lid/tailgate.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 126: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 126/258

Page 127: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 127/258

Page 128: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 128/258

  D  r  i  v  i  n  g  p  r

  e  c  a  u  t  i  o  n  s

126

see page 88. For the trailer, comply with the

manufacturer's specifications.

Run Flat Indicator

Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after a trailer

has been attached or detached, see page 88.

Outside mirrors

Two outside mirrors which bring both rear cor-

ners of the trailer into your field of view are

required by law. Mirrors of this kind can be

obtained from BMW Service as optional acces-

sories.

Electrical consumers

When towing a caravan, try to avoid operating

electrical equipment for too long at a time, in

order to limit the drain on the car's battery.

The power output of the trailer's rear lightsmust not exceed the following values:

Flashing turn indicators: 42 W each side

Tail lights: 60 W each side

Brake lights: 84 W total

Rear fog lights: 42 W total

Reversing lights: 42 W total

Before starting a journey, check that the

trailer's rear lights are operating correctly.

Driving without functioning rear lights could put

other road users at risk.<

Towing a trailer

Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,

approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may

start to snake, depending on design and load.<

Counteracting snaking

If the trailer nevertheless begins to snake, the

outfit can only be stabilised by braking hard

immediately. Only attempt to steer out of thesituation if this is absolutely essential, and make

any steering movements as cautiously as pos-

sible and without endangering other road users.

Trailer Stability Control*

The system helps you to neutralise a trailer's

tendency to swing from side to side. It detects

snaking movements and promptly brakes the

vehicle so that road speeds fall to below the

critical range and the outfit is stabilised.

The system functions whenever a trailer is

towed and connected to the corresponding

power socket, at road speeds of at least approx.

65 km/h, approx. 40 mph.

If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no

trailer is attached, for example during use of a

bicycle carrier with lights, the system may

become active in extreme driving situations.

The system cannot intervene if the trailer veers

instantly, e.g. on slippery or loose road sur-

faces. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can

tip over before any snaking motion is detected.

The system is not operational if DSC is deacti-

vated or malfunctioning, see page 85.

Gradients

In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up

other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients

steeper than 12Ξ when towing a trailer. If a

supplementary permit for heavier trailer loads

has been obtained, the limit is 8Ξ, see

page 226.

Downhill gradients

Special care must be taken when descending

gradients, where a trailer is more susceptible to

snaking.Before starting to descend, always change

down to the next lower gear, if necessary as far

as first gear, and drive down the hill slowly.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 129: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 129/258

 127

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 130: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 130/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 131: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 131/258

NavigationThis chapter describes how you can ent

destinations and choose your route, so th

your navigation system guides you reliably

your destinatio

Navigation

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 132: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 132/258

Page 133: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 133/258

 131

2. Press the controller.

Further menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired view of the route or

"Vehicle position".

4. Press the controller.

Displaying arrow view in map view

Professional navigation system:

When the navigation system proposes achange of direction, the arrow view is shown

briefly.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"

is selected and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Languages" is selected and press the

controller.

6. Select "Navigation arrow pop-up display"

and press the controller.

 The arrow view appears.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 134: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 134/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

132

Destination input

You can choose from the following options for

entering a destination:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Entering a destination via voice com-

mands*, see page 136> Selecting a destination via Information, see

page 139

> Selecting a destination from a list, see Des-

tination list, page 141

> Selecting a destination from the address

book, see page 142

> Selecting home address, see page 144.

Once you have selected a destination, you are

ready to start route guidance, see page 147.

You can also store a navigation destination on a

favourites button/programmable memory key;

see page 19.

Only enter data when the car is standing

still, and always obey the actual traffic

regulations and road signs in the event of any

contradiction between the traffic situation and

the instructions given by the navigation system.

Otherwise, you risk endangering the safety of

the passengers in your car and other road

users.<

Calling up navigation

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up

"Navigation".

3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

Entering a destinationmanually

The wordmatch principle, see page 145, makes

the input of place-names and streets easier.

This makes it possible to enter different spell-

ings, and names are completed automatically

so that stored place-names and streets can be

called up quickly.

1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Navigation" is selected and press the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 135: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 135/258

 133

controller.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press controller.

3. Select "Address input" and press the con-

troller.

In addition, the system supports you with the

following special features:

> If you do not enter a street name, you will be

guided to the centre of the town or city.

> You can skip input of the country, town or

city if you wish to retain previous inputs.

Selecting a country

1. Select "Country" or the country displayed

and press the controller.

The list of available countries is displayed.

2. Select your destination country and press

the controller.

With the Professional navigation system,

Europe can also be selected.

At least the town/city or its postcode must be

entered in order to start route guidance.

Entering a destination by town or city

name1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed and

press the controller.

2. Select the initial letter and press the con-

troller.

A list of all places starting with that letter is

shown on the control display.

3. Delete letters, if necessary:

> To delete individual numbers or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.> To delete all numbers or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press and hold down the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 136: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 136/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

134

4. Enter more letters if necessary.

The list is gradually narrowed down with

every subsequent letter that you enter.

> To enter spaces, if necessary:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the third field from the top. Turn the control-

ler until the town or city name is selected in

the list and press the controller.

Entering a destination by postcode

1. Select "City" or "City / Postcode" and press

the controller.

2. Enter postcode:

Select the individual characters and press

the controller each time.

> To enter spaces:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.> To delete individual numbers or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press the controller.

> To delete all numbers or letters:

Move the controller to the right to select

and press and hold down the con-

troller.

3. Select postcode and press the controller.

The name of the appropriate destination is

displayed.

4. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until the

destination is selected and press the con-

troller.

Entering street, house number and junction

After entering the street, you can add the junc-

tion or house number.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 137: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 137/258

 135

Entering a street and junction

1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and

press the controller.

2. Enter the street.

The street is entered in the same manner as

the town or city.

Enter the junction in the same way as the street.

Entering a street without entering atown/city

With the Professional navigation system:

You can also enter a street without entering a

town or city. In this case, all streets in the

entered country are offered. The respective

town or city is shown after the street name.

If a town or city has been entered already, this

entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in

instances where the desired street cannot be

found in the entered town or city because itbelongs to a different district, for example.

1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost

field.

The arrow is selected.

2. Turn the controller to the right until a

request appears to enter a street within the

country, and press the controller.

3. Move the highlight marker to the second

field from the top and enter the street.

Entering a house number

You may enter any house number that is stored

on the navigation DVD for the street in question.

1. Select "Building number" and press the

controller.

2. To enter the house number:

Select the individual characters and press

the controller each time.

3. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until the

house number is selected and press the

controller.

Business navigation system:If not all the house numbers in a street are

stored on the navigation DVD, a selection with

ranges of numbers is displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 138: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 138/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

136

Starting route guidance from a manualdestination input

> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

Route guidance is started immediately.

> If you do not want to start route guidance

right away:

Select "Add to destination list" and press

the controller.

The destination is stored in the destination

list, see page 141.

Displaying information on thedestination

Business navigation system:

Select "Information" and press the controller.

For details on Information see page 139.

Entering a destination viavoice commands*

With the Professional navigation system you

can enter a desired destination via the voice

input system. During destination entry, it is pos-

sible at any time to switch between voice com-

mands and entries via iDrive; to do so, reacti-

vate the voice input system if necessary.

You can have the possible commands

read aloud to you via {Options}.<

1. Press the button on the steering wheel

or in the centre console.

Selecting a country

1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of

destination.

Say the name of the destination country in the

language of the voice input system.

Entering destination

The destination can be spelled or entered as an

entire word.

Spelling the destinationTo enter a destination, spell it in the manner in

which it is spelled in the destination country.

Say the letters fluently and at normal volume,

and avoid unnatural emphasis and pauses.

The system can propose up to 20 destina-tions that match your entries. Up to

2.   {Address input}

2. Say the name of the destination coun-

try.

1. Spell the name of the town or city:

Say at least the first three letters of the

destination. The more letters you say,

the more precisely the system will rec-

ognise the town or city.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 139: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 139/258

 137

6 entries at a time are displayed on the con-

trol display.

The town or city can also be selected from the

list via iDrive:

Turn the controller until the destination is

selected and press the controller.

Entering the destination as an entire

word*The names of towns/cities and streets located

in the region in which the language of the voice

input system is spoken can be entered as whole

words.

Example: to enter a town/city within Germany as

a whole word, the language of the system must

be German.

A prerequisite is the use of a suitable navigation

DVD.

Speak fluently and at normal volume, and avoidunnatural emphases and pauses.

1. Wait for the system to ask for the destina-

tion town/city.

The system can propose up to 6 destina-

tions that match your entries.

The town or city can also be selected from the

list via iDrive:

Turn the controller until the destination isselected and press the controller.

Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-

not be distinguished by the system are

summarised in a separate list and shown as a

town/city followed by three dots.

If applicable, select this entry using {Yes}. Then

select the desired town/city in that list.<

Entering a street and house number

The street is entered in the same manner as thetown or city.

To enter the house number:

The system suggests a town or city.

2. Select a town or city:

> To select chosen town/city: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {No}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> To show other entries on the list:

{Next page}

> To spell the town/city again:

{Repeat}

2. Say the name of the destination town/

city.

The system suggests a town or city.

3. Select a town or city:

> To select chosen town/city: {Yes}

> To select other town/city: {No}

> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> To enter the town/city again:

{Repeat}

> To enter the town/city by spelling:

{Spell}

1.   {Building number}

2. Say the house number.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 140: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 140/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

138

Starting route guidance

Route guidance is started immediately.

Storing a destination

The destination is added to the destination list

or can be stored in the address book.

Selecting a destination viamap

If you know only where a destination or road is

located, you can use a map to enter the destina-

tion. You can select the destination on the map

by means of cross-hairs and then transfer it for

route guidance.

With the Business navigation system, a naviga-

tion DVD of version 2007-1 or higher is required

to select a destination via map.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

"New destination" is selected.

2. Press controller.

3. Select "Destination input map" and press

the controller.

A map section is displayed on the control

display:

> Around the current destination during

route guidance

> Around the last destination entered if

route guidance is switched off 

4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

> To change the scale: turn controller.

> To move the map: move the controller in

the corresponding direction.

The controller can be moved left, right,

forward and back.

5. To incorporate the destination into route

guidance or to save it, press the controller.

The selected destination and further menu

items are displayed.

{Start guidance}

{Add to destination list} or{Add to address book}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 141: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 141/258

 139

6. Select the desired menu item:

> "Start route guidance" starts route guid-

ance.

> "Show vehicle position" places your

car's position at the centre of the map.

> "Show destination position" places the

current destination at the centre of the

map.> "Proceed" switches back to "Destina-

tion input map".

>  Exit the menu.

7. Press controller.

The map for destination input can also be called

up from the map view:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting a destination viaInformation

You can call up selected destinations, e.g.

hotels, tourist attractions or hospitals, and

transfer them for route guidance.

Professional navigation system

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select "Information" and press the control-

ler.

3. Select place or country:

> "On destination"

> "On location"

> "Other place"

4. Press controller.

5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels / restau-

rants", and press the controller.

6. If applicable, enter search criteria, e.g. max-

imum distance from current location.

7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-

troller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 142: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 142/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

140

Destinations are displayed on the control

display.

8. Select a destination and press the control-

ler.

The scope of information and sym-

bols depends on the respective navi-

gation DVD.<

9. Select the desired menu item:

> To transfer the address to the destina-tion list and start route guidance:

Select the symbol and press the

controller.

> To establish a telephone connection:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

> To display other destinations:

Select the symbol and press the

controller.

> To start a new search:

Select the symbol and press the con-

troller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Business navigation system

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select "Information" and press the control-

ler.

3. Select a town or city:

> "On destination"

> "On location"

> "Other place"

> "On country"

4. Press controller.

5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels / restau-

rants", and press the controller.

Destinations are displayed on the control

display. With "On destination", "Other

place" and "On country", the destinations

are sorted alphabetically; with "On location"

they are sorted according to distance.

6. If applicable, select letters and press the

controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 143: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 143/258

 141

The list is narrowed down successively with

every additional letter that you enter.

7. Select a destination and press the control-

ler.

8. Select a menu item:

> To transfer the address to the destina-

tion list and start route guidance:

Select "Accept as destination" and

press the controller.

> To establish a telephone connection:

Select "Place call" and press the con-

troller.

> To display the address and phone

number, select "Details" and press the

controller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols in the map view

If you have selected the category 'Hotels', for

example, and started the search, the hotels are

shown as symbols on the map.

To hide the symbols in the map view:

1. Select the symbol and press the control-

ler.

2. Select "Hide icons" and press the control-

ler.

The symbols are hidden.

To show the symbols:

Select "Show icons" and press the controller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination list

The last 20 destinations entered into the sys-

tem are shown in the destination list. You can

call up these destinations and incorporate them

into route guidance.

If you are planning a longer journey, for exam-

ple, you can save all the destinations you wish

to drive to in the destination list in advance, seeEntering a destination manually on page 132.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The destination last entered is listed first in the

destination list.

 This symbol identifies the current destina-

tion during route guidance.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 144: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 144/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

142

To show other destinations in the destination

list:

Turn controller.

Incorporating the destination intoroute guidance

1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.

Editing the destination list

1. Select the desired destination in the desti-

nation list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

> To save the entry:

Select "Add to address book".

> To display information about the desti-

nation:

Select "Info on destination".

> To delete the entry:

Select "Delete entry".

> To delete all entries:

Select "Delete list". Route guidance will

be switched off.

> To change the entry:

Select "Change destination". Operating

principle, see Entering a destination by

town or city name, page 133.3. Press controller.

Address book 

Calling up address book 

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in the addressbook 

You can save approx. 100 destinations in the

address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con-troller.

3. Select "Enter address yourself" and press

the controller.

4. Enter a name and address, see also Enter-

ing a destination manually, page 132.

5. Select "Save address" and press the con-

troller.

The entry is saved in the address book.

You can also save a destination from the desti-

nation list in the address book, see page 141.

Storing current position*

Your current position can be transferred to the

address book.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 145: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 145/258

 143

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until "New

address" is selected and press the control-

ler.

3. Select "Use current location as address"

and press the controller.

The name given can be modified. Operating

principle, see Entering a destination manu-

ally, page 132.

4. Select "Save address" and press the con-

troller.

You can transfer your current position to the

address book even if you have left the area dig-

itised on the navigation DVD. To do this, you

have to enter a name.

Selecting destinations from addressbook 

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

The stored entries are displayed on the

control display.

2. Select an entry and press the controller.

To start route guidance:

Select "Start guidance" and press the control-

ler.

Changing destinations from addressbook 

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select an entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit" and press the controller.

4. Change the entry.

Operating principle, see Entering a destina-

tion manually, page 132.

5. Select "Save address" and press the con-

troller.

Deleting destinations from addressbook individually

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.2. Select an entry and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 146: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 146/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

144

3. Select "Delete" and press the controller.

Deleting all destinations from addressbook 

1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-

troller.5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Delete data" is selected and press the

controller.

6. Select "Delete address book" and press the

controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Saving home address

You can save your current position or the cur-

rent destination as your home address in the

address book. This entry appears in second

place in the address book.

Saving home address

1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until

"Home address" is selected and press the

controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address" or

"Save current destination" during routeguidance and press the controller.

4. With the Professional navigation system:

Select "Save address" and press the con-

troller.

Accepting home address asdestination

1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-troller.

Changing home address

1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Edit" and press the controller.

Operating principle, see Entering a destina-

tion manually, page 132.

Selecting route

You can influence the route calculated by

selecting various route criteria. You can change

the route criteria as often as you like during des-

tination input or during route guidance.

The route is planned according to fixed rules.

The type of road is also taken into account, e.g.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 147: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 147/258

 145

motorways or winding roads. The road types

are stored on the navigation DVD. For this rea-

son, the route proposed by the system will not

necessarily be the one the driver expects from

experience.

Altering route criteria

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until

"Route criteria" is selected and press the

controller.

The various criteria are listed on the control

display.

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

> "Use motorways"

Motorways and arterial roads are given

priority.> "Exclude motorways"

Motorways are avoided as far as possi-

ble.

> "Fast route"

The fast route, being a combination of

the shortest possible route and the fast-

est roads.

> "Short route"

Short route, irrespective of how fast or

slow progress will be.

4. Press controller.

 The route criterion is selected.

5. Select additional criteria for the route as

appropriate, then press the controller:

> "Dynamic route"*Automatic alteration of route in the event

of traffic congestion. Depending on the

class of road and the length of the

obstruction, the computed route mighttake you through the obstruction.

> "Exclude toll roads"

Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.

> "Exclude ferries"

Ferries are avoided as far as possible.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Route criteria can also be changed in the arrow

or the map view:

1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and

press the controller.

2. Select a route criterion and press the con-

troller.

Wordmatch principle

The wordmatch principle makes the input of

place-names and streets easier. It compares

your destination inputs continuously with thedata stored on the navigation DVD, and reacts

immediately. This has the following advantages

for you:

> You can input place-names in a form that

may differ from the official version, provided

that the alternative entry is familiar in

another country or language.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 148: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 148/258

  D  e  s  t  i  n  a

  t  i  o  n  i  n  p  u  t

146

Example:

Instead of the English version "Munich" you

can input the German name "München" or

the Italian version "Monaco".

> When entering place-names or streets, the

system completes the name automatically

as soon as it has been identified beyond

doubt.

> The system offers only those letters for

selection and entry, that occur in names

stored on the navigation DVD. This makes it

impossible to enter incorrect names or

unknown addresses.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 149: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 149/258

Page 150: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 150/258

  R  o  u  t  e

  g  u  i  d  a  n  c  e

148

2. Select "Stop guidance" or "Guidance" and

press the controller.

If you did not reach the destination before the

end of the last journey, the display at the start of

the next journey will show the inquiry:

"Continue guidance?".

Route guidance starts automatically after a brief

moment.

To start route guidance immediately:Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Displaying the route

Depending on the equipment version, various

modes are available for displaying the course of

the route during route guidance.

From another menu, you can change

directly to the screen last shown, see

Convenient call-up of menu items onpage 15.<

Displaying arrow view

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field

from the top. Turn the controller until

"Arrow view" is selected and press the con-

troller.

The arrow view is displayed.

1 Switching voice messaging on/off 

2 Calling up traffic information* manually

3 Selecting route criteria

4 Starting/ending route guidance

5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

6 Distance to the next change of direction

7 Current position

8 Direction of travel

> Outline of an arrow:

Route guidance on the calculated route

> Solid arrow:

Arrow points to the calculated route as

the crow flies if the vehicle is in an area

not recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g.

in a multi-storey car park.

Business navigation system:

Arrow points to the destination as the

crow flies if the navigation DVD has been

ejected and the route could not be cal-

culated.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-

sion, the expected time of arrival and the dis-

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 151: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 151/258

 149

tance to the destination are displayed in the top

or bottom line of the control display.

The arrows appear in a different fashion before

a change of direction.

1 Street name for change of direction

2 Distance to change of direction

3 Change of direction

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying map view

You can have your current position shown on a

map. After starting route guidance, the planned

route is shown on the map.

With the Business navigation system, the map

view can be displayed when the navigation DVD

is in the drive.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field

from the top. Turn the controller until the

desired map view is selected:

> "Map north-oriented"

> "Map, indicating dir. of travel"

> Professional navigation system:

"Perspective"

3. Press controller.

Professional navigation system

1 Switching voice messaging on/off 

2 Starting/ending route guidance

3 Selecting destination via map

4 Displaying the menu in which the last

selected information can be displayed/hid-

den, see Selecting a destination via Infor-mation, page 139

5 Changing map view

>  "Map north-oriented"

>  "Map, indicating dir. of travel"

>  "Perspective"

6 Altering route criteria

7 Calling up traffic information* manually

8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The expected time of arrival and the distance to

the destination will be displayed in the bottom

line of the control display.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

If the scale is smaller than 500 km or 250 miles,

you can choose whether to align the map point-

ing towards north, in the direction of travel, or in

perspective. At scales from 500 km or

250 miles upward, the map is always displayed

pointing towards north.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 152: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 152/258

  R  o  u  t  e

  g  u  i  d  a  n  c  e

150

Business navigation system

1 Switching voice messaging on/off 

2 Starting/ending route guidance

3 Selecting destination via map

4 Displaying the menu in which the last

selected information can be displayed/hid-

den, see Selecting a destination via Infor-

mation, page 139

5 Changing map view

>  "Map north-oriented"

>  "Map, indicating dir. of travel"

6 Altering route criteria

7 Calling up traffic information* manually

8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The expected time of arrival and the distance to

the destination will be displayed in the bottom

line of the control display.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

If the scale is smaller than 500 km or 250 miles,

you can choose whether to align the map point-

ing towards north or in the direction of travel. At

scales from 500 km or 250 miles upward, the

map is always displayed pointing towards north.

Changing map view

 

Select the corresponding symbol and press the

controller.

The next map view will be displayed.

Changing the scale

Turn the controller to change the scale.

Displaying roads and places along theroute

You can have the roads and towns along the

route displayed during route guidance.

The distances to be covered along each section

of the route are likewise displayed.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until

"Route list" is selected and press the con-

troller.

Congestion warnings are also displayed; with

the Professional navigation system directional

arrows are displayed as well.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Route guidance by voicemessages

Switching voice messaging on/off 

During route guidance, voice messages can be

switched on or off in the arrow view or the map

view:

Select the symbol and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 153: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 153/258

 151

To switch the voice messages on or off at any

time:

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"

is selected and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Languages" is selected and press the

controller.

6. Select "Voice output of nav. system" and

press the controller.

 Voice messaging is switched on.

Repeating and cancelling voicemessages

You can also make the following adjustments

with the programmable buttons on the steering

wheel, see page 48:

> To have a voice message repeated:

Press the button.

>To switch voice messaging on/off:Press button for longer.

> With the Business navigation system, to

switch off voice messages during an

announcement:

Press the button.

Adjusting the volume of the voicemessages

The volume can be adjusted only while a voice

message is being issued.

1. If necessary, have the last voice message

repeated.

2. Turn the knob during the voice message

until the desired volume is obtained.

This volume is independent of the volume of the

audio and video sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Changing the route

Changing the course of a route

Business navigation system:

During route guidance, you can specify up to

two points by which the route should pass, e.g.

places or motorway intersections. These points

are predetermined by the navigation system

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 154: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 154/258

  R  o  u  t  e

  g  u  i  d  a  n  c  e

152

and depend on the length of the route, among

other factors.

Specifying a point

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until

"Route via" is selected and press the con-

troller.

3. Select the point, e.g. Munich, and press the

controller.

4. Select "Calculate" and press the controller.

The new route is calculated.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Deleting the specified points

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until

"Route via" is selected and press the con-

troller.

3. In the second field from the top, select

"Route via" and press the controller.

4. Select "Calculate" and press the controller.

The points are no longer specified for the route.

Avoiding sections of a route

During route guidance, you can also instruct the

navigation system to detour around sections of

the route. You do this by specifying after howmany kilometres of the original route you wish

to return to it.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the third field

from the top. Turn the controller until "New

route for" is selected and press the control-

ler.

A particular section of the route can be

avoided:

> With the Professional navigation sys-

tem, throughout the entire route

> With the Business navigation system, for

up to 50 km or 50 miles

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired

number and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 155: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 155/258

Page 156: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 156/258

  R  o  u  t  e

  g  u  i  d  a  n  c  e

154

4. Turn the controller until "Traffic information

settings" is selected and press the control-

ler.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Traffic information" is selected and

press the controller.

6. Select a TMC station and press the control-

ler.

"AUTO": automatic selection of the TMC

station with the strongest received signal.

From another menu, you can change

directly to the screen last shown, see

Convenient call-up of menu items on

page 15.<

Filtering traffic information

Business navigation system:

You can filter which traffic information the sys-

tem is to display:1. Call up start menu.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Traffic information settings" and

press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Show / Hide info types" is selected

and press the controller.

6. Select the type of traffic information and

press the controller.

 Traffic information can be received and dis-

played.

Calling up traffic information manually

During route guidance

During route guidance, traffic information can

be switched on or off in the arrow view or the

map view.

 If the symbol appears outlined in red, traffic

information is available for the planned route.

Select the symbol and press the controller.

During route guidance, traffic information items

along the planned route will be marked bymeans of triangles with red borders.

Traffic information on the planned route is

shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-

cle's current position.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 157: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 157/258

 155

While route guidance is switched off 

1. Call up start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up

"Navigation".

3. Select "Traffic information" and press the

controller.

Traffic information on the planned route is

shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-

cle's current position.

Displaying detailed traffic information

Select a traffic information item from the list and

press the controller.

To exit the menu:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Traffic information symbols

Traffic event at map scale larger than

10 km or 5 miles, arrow points inaffected direction of travel

A number of traffic situations are

pending. Enlarge the scale to view

each of these individually.

Traffic light failure

Roadworks

Unspecified traffic obstruction

Transport of hazardous load

Oncoming vehicle

Height restriction

No parking

Fog

Intense rainfall

Slippery road

Cross winds

Smog

Road closed

Risk of congestion

Stop-and-go traffic

Congestion

Icy roads

Uneven surface

Accident

Narrow road

Delay

Traffic check

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 158: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 158/258

  R  o  u  t  e

  g  u  i  d  a  n  c  e

156

Representation of traffic information inthe map view

The traffic information symbols are shown in

the map view up to a scale of 200 km or

100 miles.

Professional navigation system:

At scales of up to 10 km or 5 miles, additional

information is displayed. The length, directionand effect of a traffic obstruction are shown by

means of arrows along the route, e.g.:

Business navigation system:

At scales of up to 10 km or 5 miles, additional

information is displayed. The length and effect

of a traffic obstruction are indicated by means

of triangles along the route. The start of the traf-

fic obstruction is indicated by the symbol for the

particular kind of traffic obstruction.

Along the planned route

Symbol with red border enclosing the traffic

obstruction symbol.

Outside of the planned route

> Map scale up to 10 km or 5 miles:

Symbol with grey border enclosing the traf-

fic obstruction symbol

> Map scale from 20 km or 10 miles:

Symbol with grey border

Traffic information during routeguidance

System behaviour varies, depending on

whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected, see

page 145.

Displaying traffic obstructions

If the navigation system receives information on

a traffic obstruction and "Dynamic route" is not

selected, then within approx. 100 km or

50 miles of the obstruction you are provided

with specific information such as the length of

the congestion.

The last possible turnoff will be shown to you

shortly before you will reach it.

Professional navigation system:

Select "Plan detour" and press the controller.

The navigation system calculates a new route

to avoid the traffic jam.

Business navigation system:

Select "Dynamic route planning" and press the

controller.

The navigation system calculates a route

depending on road type as well as the type and

length of the traffic obstruction. The route may

lead through the obstruction or avoid the traffic

congestion.

This information is also displayed if you have

called up another application on the control dis-

play.

Not displaying traffic obstructions

If "Dynamic route" is selected, the route is

changed automatically in the event of traffic

obstructions. The system does not indicate

traffic obstructions on the original route.

Depending on the class of road and the length

Slowly moving traffic

Stop-and-go traffic

Congestion

Traffic event in both directions

(yellow) Slowly moving traffic

(yellow) Stop-and-go traffic

(red) Congestion

(red) Danger

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 159: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 159/258

 157

of the obstruction, the computed route might

take you through the obstruction.

Displaying vehicle position*

You can also have your car's current position

displayed when the route guidance is switched

off.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field

from the top. Turn the controller until "Vehi-

cle position" is selected and press the con-

troller.

The present position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a

name for your present position, the degrees

longitude and latitude are displayed.

To exit the menu:Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can also have the current position dis-

played on a map, see page 149.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 160: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 160/258

  W  h  a  t  t  o  d  o  i  f . . .

158

What to do if ...

What to do if ...

> the prompt to insert a navigation DVD is dis-

played, even though there is one in the

drive?

The navigation DVD might not be the cor-

rect DVD for the navigation system. The

DVD is labelled correspondingly.

> you call up your car's current position, but

the display is not accurate?

You are in a poor-reception area or in an

area not covered by the navigation DVD, or

the system is currently calculating your

position. Reception will normally be possi-

ble outdoors.

> a destination is not transferred to the route

guidance system?

The data for the destination is not available

on the navigation DVD currently in use.

Choose a destination as close as possible

to the original one.

> a destination without a street is not trans-

ferred to the route guidance system?

No city centre can be determined on the

navigation DVD for the place specified.

Enter any street or a specific destination for

the town or city in question, e.g. the trainstation, then start route guidance.

> you wish to input a destination, but the cor-

rect letters of the alphabet cannot be

selected?

The data for the destination is not available

on the navigation DVD currently in use. In

this case the system will not offer the letters

for selection. Choose a destination as close

as possible to the original one.

> directions for turning cease to be givenimmediately before junctions during route

guidance?

You are driving in an area for which full dig-

ital information is not yet available on the

navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicat-

ing a turn, you will see an arrow which indi-

cates the general direction of your planned

route. Or you have deviated from the pro-

posed route and the system requires a few

seconds to calculate a new route.

> the navigation system refuses to respond to

inputs?

If the car battery was disconnected, it takes

about 10 minutes after reconnection for the

system to regain full operational status.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 161: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 161/258

 159

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 162: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 162/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 163: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 163/258

EntertainmenThis chapter tells you how to operate the rad

CD and external audio device and how to adju

the tone settings for these system

Entertainmen

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 164: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 164/258

  O  n  /  o  f  f  a  n

  d  s  e  t  t  i  n  g  s

162

On/off and settings

The following audio and video sources share

the same controls and adjustment features:

> Radio

> CD player

> CD changer*> TV*

Controls

The audio and video sources can be operated

via:

> Buttons near the CD player

> iDrive

> Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9

> Favourites buttons/programmable memory

keys, see page 19

Buttons on CD player

Specification with one disc drive

1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/

off, volume

> Press: to switch on/off.

When switched on, the radio station last

tuned or the CD track last played is

called up.

> Turn: to adjust the volume.

2  CD eject

3 Drive for audio CD and navigation DVD

4  Station/track search

> To change radio stations.

> To select tracks for CD player and CD

changer.

Specification with two disc drives

1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/

off, volume

> Press: to switch on/off.

When switched on, the radio station last

tuned or the CD track last played is

called up.

> Turn: to adjust the volume.

2 Drive for audio CD

3  CD eject

4  Station/track search

> To change radio stations.

> To select tracks for CD player and CD

changer.

> To change a TV channel.

5 Drive for navigation DVD

Operation via iDrive

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 165: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 165/258

 163

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

There is a choice of:

> "FM" and "AM": radio reception

> "DAB": radio reception of digital stations*

> "CD": CD player or changer

> "Audio AUX": AUX-IN port, USB/audio

interface

> "TV": television reception

> "Set": depending on the audio source in

question, further settings can be made, e.g.

for the radio: switch traffic reports* on/off,

update stations with the strongest received

signal, store stations, tone settings, sample

stations.

From another menu, you can changedirectly to the screen last shown, see

Convenient call-up of menu items on

page 15.<

As of radio readiness, the selected audio source

is saved for the remote control currently in use.

Switching on/off 

To switch audio output for entertainment sys-

tems on/off:Press button 1 on the CD player.

 This symbol on the control display indi-

cates that audio output has been switched off.

In vehicles equipped with a single disc drive,

audio output remains available for approxi-

mately 20 minutes after the ignition has been

switched off.

All you have to do is switch audio output back

on.

Adjusting the volume

Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired

volume is obtained.

You can also adjust the volume with buttons onthe steering wheel, see page 9.

As of radio readiness, the setting is saved for

the remote control currently in use.

Adjusting the volume for trafficreports*

Turn knob 1 during a traffic report until the

desired volume is obtained.

This volume is retained for subsequent traffic

reports. If other audio or video sources are setlouder than the traffic reports, the volume of a

report is increased correspondingly.

Tone settings

You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble

and bass or the speed-dependent volume

increase.

The tone settings are applied to all audio

sources.

As of radio readiness, the settings are saved for

the remote control currently in use.

Altering tone settings

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 166: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 166/258

Page 167: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 167/258

 165

1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the

controller.

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theatre".

3. Press the controller.

LOGIC7 room acoustics is switched on.

To switch off the room acoustics effect:

Select "Off" and press the controller.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered

trademarks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the

Harman International Group.

Equaliser*

You can adjust individual audio frequency

ranges.

1. Select "Equaliser" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to

select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is obtained.

Resetting the tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default

setting.

1. Call up start menu.2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Reset" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Specification with two disc drives:

Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 168: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 168/258

  R  a  d  i  o

166

Radio

Your radio is designed to receive the following

stations:

> FM: stations in the VHF waveband

> AM: stations in the LW*, MW and SW* 

wavebands> DAB: digitally transmitted stations*, see

page 171

Listening to the radio

Press the knob if audio output is switched off.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".

4. Press controller.

Stations are shown on the control display

according to a variety of selection criteria, e.g.

"All stations".

If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM

waveband or if the displayed stations are no

longer receivable, update the stations with the

strongest received signal, see page 167.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

Buttons on CD player

 Press the button for the corre-

sponding direction.

The next station displayed will be called up.

You can also change the stations with buttons

on the steering wheel, see page 9.

Changing selection criteria

In addition to the stations currently displayed,

you can have stations for a different selection

criterion displayed.

You can choose between the following selec-

tion criteria:

> "All stations":

Stations that can currently be received in

the waveband "FM" waveband.

> "Autostore":

The stations with the strongest receivedsignals in the "AM" waveband.

> "Memorised stations":

Stations that you have previously stored,

see page 168.

> "Manual frequency selection":

Setting stations that can be received in

addition to those displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 169: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 169/258

 167

To change the selection criterion:

1. Move the highlight marker to the second

field from the top.

2. Choose the selection criterion and press

the controller.

Sampling stations, Scan

The stations on the current waveband are auto-

matically sampled in succession.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press controller.

Further menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

The stations are sampled.

To stop sampling:

1. Press controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.Station sampling is interrupted and the

selected station is retained.

Buttons on CD player

 To sample stations, press and hold

down the button for the corresponding direc-

tion.

To stop Scan, press the button again.

Manual frequency selection

With "Manual frequency selection" you can

select stations that can be received in addition

to those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second

field from the top.

3. Select "Manual frequency selection" and

press the controller.

4. Turn the controller to select a particular fre-

quency.

Updating stations with strongestreceived signals

If on a longer journey you move out of the

reception range of the stations originallyreceived, you can update the list of stations

received with the strongest signals in the AM

waveband.

1. Select "AM" and press the controller.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second

field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 170: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 170/258

  R  a  d  i  o

168

4. Press controller.

Further menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of stations with the strongest

received signals is updated. The frequencies of

the stations are displayed.

Memorising stationsVia iDrive

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Move the highlight marker to the second

field from the top. Turn the controller until

the desired selection criterion is selected

and press the controller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station.

"Set" is selected.

4. Press controller.

Further menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Save" and press the controller.

"Memorised stations" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory location is selected.

7. Press controller.

The station is now memorised.

The stations for the last selection criterion are

displayed again after a short time.

As of radio readiness, the stations are saved for

the remote control currently in use.

Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys

You can also store a station on a favourites but-

ton/programmable memory key; see also

page 19.

1. Select the station.

2.  ... Press desired button for

longer.

Changing memory location

1. Select "Memorised stations" and press the

controller.

2. Select the desired station.

"Set" is selected.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 171: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 171/258

Page 172: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 172/258

Page 173: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 173/258

 171

Digital radio DAB

Digital radio provides you with additional sta-

tions that are transmitted with a high sound

quality.

Several stations are combined to form an

ensemble. Up to 15 stations are broadcast

within an ensemble.

Each station may transmit additional informa-

tion such as weather reports or the name of the

artist performing the current music track.

Some stations feature additional programmes;

e.g. sports stations can broadcast various

sports events simultaneously. In such cases

you have the option of choosing a particular

sports event.

A digital radio network must be available inorder to receive digital stations.

Listening to digital radio

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. Select "DAB" and press the controller.

You will hear the station last selected.

The Control Display shows the stations and var-

ious ensembles, if applicable.

1 Ensembles

2 Stations of the selected ensemble

Changing stations

1. If necessary, move the controller to the left

to select an ensemble. Select the ensembleand press the controller.

2. Turn the controller.

To change stations via buttons on the CD

player:

 Press the button next to the CD

player or the button on the steering wheel for

the corresponding direction.

The next station displayed will be called up.

*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 174: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 174/258

  D  i  g  i  t  a  l  r  a  d  i  o  D  A  B

172

Changing selection criteria

In addition to the stations currently displayed,

you can display stations for a different selection

criterion.

> "Memorised stations"

Up to 12 stations that have been previously

saved.

Memorising stations, see page 173.

> "Autostore"

Up to 12 automatically stored ensembles,

see Updating receivable stations. Up to

15 stations are displayed for each ensem-

ble.

> "Manual frequency selection"

An ensemble and its stations are displayed.

1. Move the highlight marker to the second

field from the top.

2. Turn the controller until the desired selec-tion criterion is selected and press the con-

troller.

Updating receivable stations

Once you leave the transmission ranges of pre-

viously received stations, you can update the

display of receivable stations.

1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.

2. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

3. Press controller.

4. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of receivable stations is updated.

Up to 12 ensembles can be shown.

If "No Signal" appears on the left-hand side of

the control display, no station can currently be

received.

To update the stations when reception is possi-

ble again:

Press controller.

Displaying additional information

If offered by a particular station, additional infor-

mation can be displayed, such as weather

reports or the name of the artist performing the

current music track.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 175: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 175/258

 173

1. Select a station and press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

 The information is displayed.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Sampling stations, Scan

All stations in the current ensemble are sam-

pled in succession.

Select "Manual frequency selection" to sample

the stations of all ensembles.

1. Select a station and press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

The stations are sampled.

To stop sampling:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

Sampling is interrupted and the selected sta-

tion is retained.

Buttons on CD player:

 To start, press the button on the CD

player or the button on the steering wheel in the

corresponding direction for an extended period.

To stop, press the button again.

Manual station selection

1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.

2. Select "Manual frequency selection" and

press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left

to select an ensemble:

Select "Next" or "Previous" and press the

controller.

4. Select the station.

Memorising stations

You can store 12 stations.

1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.

2. Select "Autostore" or "Manual frequency

selection" and press the controller.

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left

to select an ensemble.4. Select the desired station and press the

controller.

5. Select "Save" and press the controller.

"Memorised stations" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory location is selected.

7. Press controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 176: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 176/258

  D  i  g  i  t  a  l  r  a  d  i  o  D  A  B

174

The station is now memorised.

The stations are stored for the remote control

currently in use.

Changing memory location

1. Select "Memorised stations" and press the

controller.

2. Select the desired station and press thecontroller.

3. Select "Save" and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until the desired mem-

ory location is selected.

5. Press controller.

The station is now memorised.

Selecting a frequency band*

Some digital stations are transmitted regionally,others also nationally.

For more information on frequency bands, con-

tact BMW Service.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "DAB" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Frequency selection" and press the

controller.

7. To select a frequency band:

> "Band III + L" for regional and national

stations

> "Band L" for regional stations

> "Band III" for national stations

8. Press controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

Automatic changeover

You can program whether the radio automati-

cally switches to the analogue frequency of a

station when the latter cannot be received dig-

itally.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Press the controller to call up the menu.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 177: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 177/258

 175

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "DAB" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Automatic FM changeover" and

press the controller.

 The reception is automatically switched to

the analogue frequency.

Once the digital frequency is received again,

the radio switches back to digital reception.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur-

rently in use.

If no analogue frequency is available for a digital

station, the reception is switched off.

Listening to additionalprogrammes

* This symbol is shown if a selected station

offers additional programmes. Sports stations,

for example, may broadcast various sports

events at the same time. You then have the

option of choosing a particular sports event.

1. Select a station and press the controller.

2. Select the "xyz" additional program and

press the controller.

 You will hear the selected programme.

The name of the programme appears in the sta-

tus line.

Once the programme is over, the radio switches

back to the selected station.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 178: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 178/258

  C  D

  p  l  a  y  e  r  a  n  d  C  D  c  h  a  n  g  e  r

176

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

Specification with two disc drives:

The upper disc drive is intended for audio CDs.

Compressed audio files*

CDs with compressed audio files known as

MP3s can be played by the CD player or CD

changer.

Removing navigation DVD

Specification with one disc drive:

The navigation DVD can be removed during

route guidance. All the data required for the

respective route guidance procedure is held in

the navigation system's buffer memory. This

enables you to listen to audio CDs during route

guidance. A message appears on the control

display if new data from the navigation DVD is

required.

Button on CD player:

 To eject the navigation DVD, press the

button.

The navigation DVD is ejected part way out of

the drive.

Starting CD player

Insert the CD into the drive with the label side

up.

The CD is pulled in automatically. The CD starts

to play automatically if audio output is switched

on. When playing CDs with compressed audio

files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute

to read in the data, depending on the directory

structure.

To start to play a CD if there is already a CD in

the drive:

iDrive, for principle see page 14.1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press

the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the second field from the top. On cars with a

CD changer, select "CD" and press thecontroller to start the CD player.

The CD starts to play if audio output is switched

on.

*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 179: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 179/258

 177

Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys

You can store the CD player function on a

favourites button/programmable memory key

from which to start the CD player; see page 19.

Starting CD changer

Load and insert the CD magazine, see

page 180.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press

the controller.

4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the second field from the top. Select thedesired CD and press the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD is

selected and played.

If the CDs in the magazine have been changed,

the lowermost CD starts to play, e.g. CD 1,

track 1.

The control display indicates how many CDs

are in the magazine.

Via favourites buttons/programmable

memory keys

You can store a CD compartment of the CD

changer on a favourites button/programmable

memory key from which to start the CD

changer; see page 19.

Selecting a track 

Buttons on CD player

 Press the button for the appropriate

direction repeatedly until the desired track is

reached.

The track is displayed on the control display.

You can also change the track with buttons on

the steering wheel, see page 9.

Via iDrive

Turn the controller to select a track.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press

the controller.

2. Select a track and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 180: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 180/258

Page 181: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 181/258

 179

Compressed audio files*

1. Select current track and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To sample all the tracks in the current

directory, select "Scan directory" and

press the controller.

> To sample all the tracks on the CD,select "Scan all" and press the control-

ler.

To stop sampling:

1. Press controller.

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and

press the controller.

Sampling is interrupted and the selected track

is retained.

Repeating tracks

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Further menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

To stop the repeat function:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files*

1. Select current track and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To repeat the chosen track, select

"Repeat track" and press the controller.

> To repeat all the tracks in the current

directory, select "Repeat directory" and

press the controller.

To stop the repeat function:

1. Press controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"

and press the controller.

Random play

The tracks on the current CD are played once

each in random order.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 182: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 182/258

Page 183: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 183/258

Page 184: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 184/258

  C  D

  p  l  a  y  e  r  a  n  d  C  D  c  h  a  n  g  e  r

182

CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the

manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs

being impossible to play, or only playable with

restrictions.

General care

Whenever necessary, use a commercially avail-

able cleaning cloth to wipe the reflective signal

side of CDs/DVDs in straight motions from the

centre outwards. For more information on how

to take care of CDs/DVDs, see booklet Looking

after your car.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 185: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 185/258

 183

AUX-IN port

You can connect an external audio device, for

instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks

over the car's loudspeaker system. You can

adjust the tone using iDrive.

Connecting

Fold the centre armrest upwards.

Connection for audio playback:

Jack plug, 3.5 mm

To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker

system, connect the headset or line-out port of

the external device to the AUX-IN port.

Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Audio AUX" is selected and press the

controller.

4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.

5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.

Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys

You can store the "Audio AUX" function on a

favourites button/programmable memory key;

to start audio playback, see page 19.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 186: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 186/258

  U  S  B  /  a  u  d  i  o

  i  n  t  e  r  f  a  c  e

184

USB/audio interface

You can connect audio devices to the USB/

audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device

(MP3 player, USB memory stick). These can be

operated using iDrive.

The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV

(PCM) and AAC as well as playlists in the M3U

format can be played.

The large number of audio devices available on

the market means it cannot be ensured that

every audio device can be operated via the vehi-

cle.

Ask your BMW Service which audio devices are

suitable.

ConnectingFold the centre armrest upwards.

1 Connection for audio playback:

Jack plug, 3.5 mm

2 USB interface

Depending on the equipment version,

your vehicle is equipped with a storage

pouch to store your audio device. It is located

under the centre armrest.<

iPod

For audio playback over the car's loudspeaker

system, connect the iPod to connections 1 and

2.

Use an iPod adapter cable to connect the iPod.

The menu structure of the iPod is supported by

the USB/audio interface.

USB device

Connect using the supplied flexible

adapter cable. This protects the USB

interface and your USB device against mechan-

ical damage.<

For audio playback over the car's loudspeaker

system, connect the USB device to connection

2.

After you connect for the first time, the informa-

tion on all tracks (e.g. artist, music style) as well

as the playlists of the USB device are trans-

ferred to the vehicle. This operation can take

some time. How long it takes depends on the

USB device and the number of tracks.

During the transfer, you can select the tracks on

the basis of the directories and file names.

After the transfer, you can call up the tracks on

the basis of the information and playlists.

The information from up to four USB devices

can be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx.

20,000 tracks.

If a fifth USB device is connected, the track

information stored in the vehicle from the first

USB device is deleted.

Tracks with integrated Digital Rights

Management (DRM) cannot be played.<

Starting audio playback 

Via iDrive

If the audio device has a device name, this is

displayed.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 187: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 187/258

 185

until "Audio AUX" is selected and press the

controller.

4. Select "USB audio" or the name of the

audio device and press the controller.

5. Playback starts with the first track.

Via favourites buttons/programmablememory keys

You can store the "USB audio" function on a

favourites button/programmable memory key;to start audio playback, see page 19.

Selecting a track 

You can call up the tracks on the basis of the

information and playlists. In the case of USB

devices, you can also call up the tracks using

the file directory.

1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-

ists", and press the controller.

2. Select a track and press the controller.

Displaying information on the track 

You can have any saved information about the

current track displayed, e.g. the name of the art-

ist.

1. Press the controller while the TV is on.2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information is shown for the current track.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 188: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 188/258

  U  S  B  /  a  u  d  i  o

  i  n  t  e  r  f  a  c  e

186

Repeating tracks

1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-

troller.

To stop the repeat function:

1. Press controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-troller.

Random play

You can play the tracks of the selected list in

random order, e.g. all tracks of one artist.

1. Select current track and press the control-

ler.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

To stop the random play order:

1. Press controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Fast forward/reverse

Buttons on the steering wheel or on the CD

player:

 Press and hold the button for theappropriate direction.

Notes

Do not expose the audio device to

extreme environmental conditions, e.g.

very high temperatures, see operating instruc-

tions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio

device can be damaged, thus reducing driving

safety while the vehicle is being driven.<

Depending on the configuration of the audio

files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, per-

fect playback cannot be ensured in every case.

Information regarding connection

> The USB/audio interface supplies the con-

nected audio devices with current if the

audio device supports this. For this reason,

do not connect the USB audio device to a

socket in the vehicle during operation.

> Do not force the connector into the USB

interface.

> Do not connect any devices such as fans or

lamps to the USB/audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard disks.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 189: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 189/258

 187

TV

Starting a channel

Press the knob if audio output is switched off.

iDrive, for principle see page 14.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. Select "TV" and press the controller.

The device selects the channel last seen.

For your own safety, the TV picture is only

on when the vehicle is moving at a speed

of less than 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph.

In certain national-market versions, the TV pic-

ture is only visible when the handbrake is

applied.<

To switch to another audio source:

Move the controller forwards while the TV is on.

Channels

The TV system is equipped with a digital-capa-ble receiver*. If you are driving through areas

where both analogue and digital television is

broadcast, both types of television can be

received. You can switch between these types.

Changing the channel

1. Press controller.

The channels are shown on the left-hand

side.

2. Select the desired channel and press thecontroller.

You can also change the channel by turning the

controller while the programme is on.

In addition, the channel can be changed with

buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9.

*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 190: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 190/258

  T  V

188

Updating display of receivablechannels

Once you have left the transmission range of a

received channel, you can update the display of

the receivable channels.

1. Press the controller while the TV is on.

2. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the channels with the strongest

received signal is updated.

Adjusting the picture*

Adjusting brightness and contrast

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Select "TV" and press

the controller to start the programme.

4. While the programme is playing, press the

controller twice.

5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Turn the controller

until "Video" is selected and press the con-

troller.

6. Select "Brightness" or "Contrast" and

press the controller.

7. Turn the controller until the desired setting

is obtained.

Resetting settings

Select "Reset" and press the controller.

Changing the standard

TV standards vary among countries. However,you can adjust your TV receiver to accommo-

date all common TV standards.

1. Press the button.

The start menu is called up.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up

"Entertainment".

3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the uppermost field. Select "TV" and press

the controller to start the programme.

4. While the programme is playing, press the

controller twice.

5. Select "Video" and press the controller.

6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to

the second field from the top. Select "TV

standard" and press the controller.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 191: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 191/258

Page 192: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 192/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 193: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 193/258

MobilityTo assist you in preserving your car's mobilit

this section contains important information o

operating fluids, wheels and tyres, maintenan

and minor repai

Mobility

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 194: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 194/258

  R  e  f  u  e  l  l  i  n  g

192

Refuelling

Tank cap

Opening

1. Open fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly press

the rear edge.

2. Turn the tank cap counter-clockwise.

3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the flap.

Closing

Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is

clearly heard to click into place.

Do not pinch the strap attached to the

cap. Otherwise, fuel vapours could

escape.<

Manually releasing the fuel filler flap

In the event of a malfunction, you can unlock the

fuel filler flap manually:

Saloon

1. Remove the cover from the right-hand trim

panel of the luggage area.

2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.

The fuel filler flap is released.

Touring

1. Fold up the luggage area floor panel.

2. Remove the cover from the right-hand trim

panel of the luggage area. To do so, turn the

screws, arrows 1, a quarter turn and take

out the cover, arrow 2.

3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.

The fuel filler flap is released.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 195: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 195/258

 193

Note when refuelling

When handling fuel, comply with

the safety regulations displayed by

garages and filling stations.<

When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into

the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle dur-

ing refuelling, otherwise

>the supply of fuel will be cut off prematurely

> fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less

effectively

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts

out for the first time.

Fuel tank capacity

If the remaining operating range is below

50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are

not assured and damage may occur.<

Petrol engine

Approx. 63 litres, approx. 13.9 Imp. gal., includ-

ing a reserve of approx. 8 litres, approx. 1.8 Imp.

gal.

Diesel engine

Approx. 61 litres, approx. 13.4 Imp. gal., includ-

ing a reserve of approx. 6.5 litres, approx.

1.4 Imp. gal.

Fuel grade

Petrol engine

Never use fuel containing lead, as other-

wise the catalytic converter will be perma-

nently damaged.

Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing

85% ethanol, nor with flex fuel. Otherwise the

engine and fuel supply system will be dam-

aged.<

For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be

sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as

possible. Since the engine has a knock control

function, it can run on different grades of fuel.

> Super Plus/premium plus fuel, octane

number 98 RON.

Fill up with fuel of this grade so that the

nominal performance values are achieved.

> You can also run the engine on:

Premium-grade unleaded fuel, octane

number 95 RON.

This fuel is also sold under the following

designations:

DIN EN 228 or Eurosuper.

> The minimum permissible grade is:

Regular-grade unleaded fuel, octane

number 91 RON.

335i: premium-grade unleaded fuel, octane

number 95 RON.

Do not fill the tank with any petrol below

the specified minimum grade. Otherwise

the engine could be damaged.<

National-market specification forleaded fuel*

This specification enables you to run the car on

leaded petrol, in addition to the fuel grades

listed above. The minimum approved grade is

91 RON.

Diesel engine

Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME,

biodiesel or petrol. If the wrong type of

fuel has been added, do not start the engine,

otherwise you risk causing damage to it.<

Contact BMW Service if the wrong type of fuel

has been added.

> Your BMW's engine is rated to run on:

Diesel oil to DIN EN 590 standard.

The filler neck is designed for refuelling at

diesel pumps.<

Winter-grade diesel

To ensure that the diesel engine operates relia-bly during the cold season of the year, it must

be run on winter-grade diesel oil, which garages

usually sell during the period in question. Fuel

filter heating is installed as standard equipment

to prevent the fuel from solidifying during oper-

ation.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 196: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 196/258

  R  e  f  u  e  l  l  i  n  g

194

Do not incorporate any additives, includ-

ing petrol, as these could cause damage

to the engine.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 197: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 197/258

 195

Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressures

Information for your safety

The condition of the tyres and maintenance of

the correct tyre pressures not only influencetyre life but are also decisive factors in road

safety and ride quality.

Checking pressures

Check the tyre pressures regularly: at

least twice a month and before setting out

on any long journey. Incorrect tyre pressures

can adversely affect the car's roadholding and

cause tyre damage, which could result in an

accident.<

Tyre pressure values

The tyre pressures for the approved tyre sizes

are visible on the driver's door post when the

driver's door is open.

If you do not see any tyre pressures listed for

your tyres' speed code letter, observe the tyre

pressures for the corresponding size, e.g.

255/45 R 17.

After correcting tyre pressures, reinitial-

ise the Run Flat Indicator, see page 88.<

Tyre pressures for trailer towing

For trailer towing, the tyre pressures specified

for higher load apply.

Tyre size

These tyre pressures apply to sizes of tyre

approved by BMW and makes of tyre recom-

mended by BMW; details are available from

BMW Service.

Condition of tyres

Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the pres-

ence of foreign bodies, unusual wear and suffi-

cient tread depth.

Minimum tread depth

The tyre tread depth should not be allowed to

drop below 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in. Below a treaddepth of 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in, there is an

increased risk of aquaplaning when driving on

wet roads at fairly high speeds.

Below a tread depth of 4 mm, approx. 3/16 in,

winter tyres become noticeably less suitable for

winter driving conditions. New tyres should be

fitted in the interest of safety.

Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove

are distributed around the tyre's circumference;

the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the

tyre's flanks identify tyres that incorporatethese wear indicators. Once the tyre tread has

worn down to the wear indicators, the tread

depth remaining is 1.6 mm, approx. 1/16 in.

Tyre damage

Unusual vibration while the car is being driven

could indicate a tyre fault or some other defect

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 198: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 198/258

  W  h  e  e  l  s

  a  n  d  t  y  r  e  s

196

on your car. This may have been caused e.g. by

driving over a kerb or similar. The same applies

to any other abnormal road behaviour, such as

pulling severely to the right or left.

In such cases, reduce speed immediately

and have the wheels and tyres checked

without delay. Proceed with caution to the near-

est BMW Service or specialist tyre dealer that

operates to BMW specifications and has suita-bly trained personnel. Have the car towed there

if necessary.

Tyre damage represents a risk of serious injury

to the car's occupants and to all other road

users.<

Age of tyres

For various reasons, such as the development

of brittleness, BMW recommends tyre replace-

ment after no more than 6 years, regardless ofthe actual wear of the tyres.

A tyre's date of manufacture is included in the

inscription on the tyre:

DOT ... 0705 means that the tyre was manufac-

tured in week 07 of 2005.

Run-flat tyres

The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is the cir-

cle with the letters RSC on the sidewall.

Run-flat tyres comprise a conditionally self-

supporting tyre and a special rim. The rein-

forcement in the sidewalls ensures that the tyre

can continue to be used subject to certain

restrictions, even if depressurised.

For information on continuing to drive with a flat

tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre, page 89.

New wheels and tyres

Have new wheels and tyres fitted only by

BMW Service or by a specialist tyre dealer

that operates to BMW specifications and has

suitably trained personnel. If such work is per-

formed inexpertly, it could result in consequen-

tial damage and thus constitute a safety risk.

Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tyres

BMW advises against the use of

retreaded tyres, as these could adversely

affect the car's safety. Their carcasses may dif-

fer in internal construction or have aged suffi-

ciently to limit their durability.<

Correct wheels and tyres

When fitting new tyres or changing over from

summer to winter tyres and vice versa, fit run-

flat tyres for your own safety. In the event of a

flat, no spare wheel is available. BMW Service

will be glad to advise you on this.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends

that damaged run-flat tyres be replaced

rather than repaired.<

BMW recommends fitting only wheels

and tyres that it has approved for your

type of vehicle, otherwise the tyres may e.g.

make contact with the vehicle body due to

impermissible tolerances, even though they are

of an approved size; this could result in a serious

accident. BMW is unable to assess the suitabil-

ity of wheels and tyres it has not approved and

cannot therefore guarantee their safety.<

Details of the correct wheel/tyre combinations

can be obtained from BMW Service.

The correct wheel and tyre combination also

has an influence on various systems, the func-

tion of which could otherwise be adversely

affected, for instance ABS, DSC or RPA.

To maintain the car's good road behaviour,

always fit tyres of the same make and tread pat-

tern to all wheels. After a tyre has been dam-

aged, fit the original wheel and tyre combination

again as soon as possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 199: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 199/258

 197

Recommended makes of tyre

Certain makes of tyre are recommended by

BMW for each tyre size. They are marked with a

clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall

of the tyre.

When properly used, these tyres meet the high-

est standards in terms of safety and handling

characteristics.

Special characteristics of winter tyres

BMW recommends you to fit winter tyres if the

car is used for driving in wintry conditions.

Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking

have better winter characteristics than summer

tyres, they do not normally match the perform-

ance of winter tyres.

Note the speed limit applicable to thesetyres

Always comply with the speed limit for the

winter tyres fitted to your car; failure to do

so could result in tyre damage and accidents.<

If the car is capable of speeds higher than that

permitted for the winter tyres, a label stating the

maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted

must be displayed in your field of view. Special-

ist tyre dealers and BMW Service can supply

these labels.

Tyre storageStore wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and prefer-

ably dark place when not in use. Protect tyres

against contamination from oil, grease and fuel.

Snow chains*

Only certain fine-link snow chains have been

tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and

recommended. BMW Service is able to provide

details.

Fit snow chains in pairs and only to the rear

wheels. When fitting, comply with the snow

chain manufacturer's instructions. When snow

chains are in use, do not exceed 50 km/h or

30 mph.

Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator if

snow chains are fitted, as the instrument

might issue an incorrect reading.

When driving with snow chains, you may find it

helpful to activate DTC temporarily, see

page 86.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 200: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 200/258

  I  n  t  h  e  e  n  g  i  n  e  c  o  m

  p  a  r  t  m  e  n  t

198

In the engine compartment

Do not work on the car unless you pos-

sess the necessary technical knowledge.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-

lines, have any work on the vehicle performed

only by BMW Service or by a workshop that

operates to BMW specifications and has suita-bly trained personnel. If such work is performed

inexpertly, it could result in consequential dam-

age and thus constitute a safety risk.<

Engine compartment lid

Releasing

Pull the lever.

Opening

To avoid damage, make sure that the

wiper arms are against the windscreen

before you open the engine compartment lid.<

Press the release lever and open the lid.

Closing

Close the engine compartment lid from a height

of about 40 cm, approx. 16 in, with some

momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing

area of the engine compartment lid isunobstructed.

If you notice during the journey that the engine

compartment lid has not been properly closed,

stop the car at the earliest possible moment and

close it correctly.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 201: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 201/258

 199

Important accessories in the engine compartment

1 Petrol engine: coolant expansion tank, see

page 202

Diesel engine: the expansion tank is on the

opposite side of the vehicle

2 Vehicle Identification Number

3 Filler neck for washer fluid for headlight

cleaning system and windscreen washer,

see page 61

4 Jump-starting connection, see page 214

5 Engine oil filler cap, see Adding engine oil

6 Diesel engine: dipstick for engine oil, see

Engine oil level

Engine oil

Engine oil consumption varies depending on

driving style and operating conditions.

Diesel engine: checking engine oil level

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface with the

engine at operating temperature, i.e. after

driving continuously for at least 10 km or

6.5 miles.

2. Switch off the engine.

3. After about 5 minutes pull out the dipstick 6 

and wipe it dry with a non-linting cloth,

paper towel or similar.

4. Carefully push the dipstick fully into its tube,

then pull it out again.

The oil level must be between the two

marks on the dipstick.

The quantity of oil between the two dipstick

marks is approx. 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 202: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 202/258

Page 203: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 203/258

Page 204: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 204/258

  I  n  t  h  e  e  n  g  i  n  e  c  o  m

  p  a  r  t  m  e  n  t

202

BMW regularly approves specific grades of

engine oil.

BMW Service can provide details of the

oils currently approved by BMW for your

car.<

Do not use any oil additives, as they could

lead to engine damage under some cir-

cumstances.<

Alternative oil grades

If exceptionally none of these oils is available,

you can top up small quantities in between oil

changes with other grades of oil. The oil speci-

fication on the container must be one of the fol-

lowing:

Petrol engines

> Preferred: BMW Longlife-01,

BMW Longlife-01 FE or BMW Longlife-04

> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-98, or

ACEA A3

Diesel engines

> Preferred: BMW Longlife-04

> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-01,

BMW Longlife-98 or ACEA A3/B4

Coolant

Do not open up the cooling system while

the engine is hot, otherwise you may

scald yourself on the escaping coolant steam.<

Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive.

Not all commercially available additives are suit-

able for your BMW. BMW Service can provide

details of which additives are suitable.

Use only suitable additives, otherwise the

engine could suffer damage. The addi-

tives are injurious to health.<

When disposing of coolant additives,

comply with the relevant environmental

protection laws.<

Checking coolant level

1. Allow the engine to cool down.

2. Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly

anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then

allow the pressure to escape before open-

ing it fully.

3. The coolant level is correct if it is between

the maximum and minimum marks in thefiller neck, see also diagram next to the filler

neck.

4. If necessary, slowly top up to correct level

but do not overfill.

5. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard to

click into place.

6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as

soon as possible.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 205: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 205/258

 203

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

The BMW Maintenance System contributes

towards upholding the roadworthiness and

operating reliability of your BMW. Its purpose is

to optimise maintenance measures with a view

to minimising the cost of looking after your car.

If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-

prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-

nificant benefit.

Condition Based Service CBS

Sensors and advanced algorithms take account

of the varying conditions in which your BMW is

used. Condition Based Service uses these to

determine current and future servicing require-

ments. The system provides you with an oppor-

tunity to tailor the scope of maintenance work

to your personal standards, so that your BMW

will always be reliably operational.

On the control display, you can have the

remaining distances and times for selected

maintenance tasks as well as any legally pre-

scribed dates displayed to you individually, see

page 75:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads: separately for front and rear

> Brake fluid

> Vehicle check

> Statutory vehicle inspections, depending

on national requirements

> Diesel particle filter*

Service data in the remote control

Your vehicle continuously saves service-

requirement information in the remote control

while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-

sor can read out this data from the remote con-trol unit, and propose an optimised mainte-

nance approach. Whenever you take your car in

for servicing you should therefore hand your

BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit

that you last used.

Make sure that the date is always set cor-

rectly, see page 79, otherwise the effec-

tiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not

assured.<

Service Booklet

More information on items that need regular

maintenance and on the scope of maintenance

required can be found in the Service Booklet.

BMW recommends that you have mainte-

nance and repair work carried out by

BMW Service.

Make sure that maintenance work is confirmed

in the Service Booklet after it has been carried

out. These entries are evidence that your vehi-

cle has been serviced regularly and correctly.<

Socket for on-boarddiagnosis OBD

Components which have a decisive effect on

exhaust emissions can be tested via the OBD

socket with a suitable device.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 206: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 206/258

  M  a

  i  n  t  e  n  a  n  c  e

204

This on-board diagnosis socket is on the

driver's side, on the underside of the instrument

panel to the left, behind a cover.

Exhaust emissions

The warning light flashes:

Engine malfunction that can damage

the catalytic converter. Have the vehicle

checked without delay.The warning light lights up:

Exhaust emissions have deteriorated. Have the

car checked as soon as possible.

Recycling

Your vehicle was designed in such a way that

the production and choice of materials are con-

ducive to recycling at a later point in time.

BMW recommends returning your vehicle at

the end of its service life to a recycling point

specified by the BMW Group. In this manner,

you can actively contribute to protecting the

environment and its resources. Vehicle recy-

cling is subject to the respective national regu-

lations. You can obtain more information in the

Internet under www.bmw.com or from your

BMW Service.

General care

Useful hints on care of your BMW are provided

in the booklet Looking after your car.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 207: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 207/258

 205

Replacing parts

Toolkit

Saloon

The toolkit is stored in a compartment on the

right-hand side of the luggage area. Remove

the cover.

Touring

The toolkit is in a storage compartment on the

left-hand side of the luggage area underneath

the floor panel.

Wiper blades

1. Fold up the wiper arm.

2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook

on the bottom, see arrow.

3. Swing the wiper blade upwards.

4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of

the windscreen, see arrow.

In order to avoid damage, make sure that

the wiper arms are against the wind-

screen before you open the engine compart-

ment.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 208: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 208/258

  R  e  p  l  a

  c  i  n  g  p  a  r  t  s

206

Touring: changing rear wiper blade

1. Fold up the wiper arm.

2. Pull off the wiper blade, see arrow.

3. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on

until it audibly engages.

Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs are important elements in

terms of your driving safety. They should,

therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recom-

mends that any bulb-related routines that you

are not familiar with or that are not described

here be entrusted to BMW Service.

Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with

the fingers, because even slight amounts

of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb

and reduce its working life. Use a clean tissue,

cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<A box containing spare bulbs is available from

BMW Service.

Only change bulbs while they are cool to

the touch. Otherwise, burns could

result.<

When working on electrical systems,

always begin by switching off the con-

sumer in question, as otherwise short-circuits

could result. Observe any instructions supplied

by the bulb manufacturer, to avoid the risk ofinjury or damage when changing bulbs.<

Please see the booklet Looking after your car

for notes on care of the headlights.

If the routine for changing a particular

bulb is not described here, please contact

BMW Service or a workshop that operates to

BMW specifications and has suitably trained

personnel.<

Light-emitting diodes LED

Controls, displays and other equipment items

inside your car have light-emitting diodes

behind a cover as their light source. These

LEDs resemble conventional lasers and are

classified by law as Class 1 light-emittingdiodes.

Do not remove the covers or expose the

eyes directly to the unfiltered light source

for several hours at a time, as this could cause

irritation to the retina.<

Xenon headlights*

These bulbs have a very long service life and are

highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon headlight fails

nonetheless, switch on the fog lights and con-tinue the journey with great care, provided that

local legislation does not prohibit this.

Have any work on the xenon headlight

system, including bulb replacement, car-

ried out only by BMW Service or a workshop

adhering to BMW specifications and employing

skilled personnel. Work that is improperly car-

ried out could otherwise result in a risk of fatal

injury due to high voltage.<

Side and parking lights

In the event of a fault, please contact BMW

Service or a workshop that operates to BMW

specifications and has suitably trained person-

nel.

Halogen headlights

H7 bulb, 55 watts

The H7 bulb is pressurised, so wear gog-

gles and gloves. There is otherwise a riskof injury if the bulb is damaged.<

One of two halogen headlight versions is

installed in your vehicle. They primarily differ in

their covers. There are separate headlight cov-

ers for low-beam headlights and high-beam

headlights.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 209: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 209/258

 207

Take care when installing the covers, as

otherwise leaks could occur and cause

damage to the headlight system.<

Access to the bulbs, version 1

The high beam headlight can be accessed from

the engine compartment, whereas the low-

beam headlight is accessed through a flap in

the wheel well.

1 Cover for high-beam headlight

2 Cover for low-beam headlight

3 Turn indicator holder

To remove the covers:

1. Fold the respective wire bracket to the side,

see arrows.

2. Flip the cover upwards and take it out of the

guide.

Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit

the covers.

Access to the bulbs, version 2

The high beam headlight can be accessed from

the engine compartment, whereas the low-

beam headlight is accessed through a flap in

the wheel well.

1 Cover for high-beam headlight

2 Cover for low-beam headlight

3 Turn indicator holder

To remove the covers:

> High-beam headlight: press the catch,

arrow 4, and take the cover out of the guide.

> Low-beam headlight: unscrew and remove

the cover, arrow 5.

Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit

the covers.

Access through the wheel well

Only for low-beam headlights and turn indica-

tors:

1. Turn the wheel inwards.

2. Open the flap in the wheel well. To do so,

use a coin, for example, to turn the fastener

anti-clockwise.

Replacing the low-beam headlight andhigh-beam headlight, version 1

1. Remove the relevant cover for the head-

light.

2. Disconnect the plug from the light.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 210: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 210/258

  R  e  p  l  a

  c  i  n  g  p  a  r  t  s

208

3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the

mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down,

arrow 2.

4. Remove the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb as shown in the detail of

the illustration above.

6. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.

7. Connect the plug.

8. Reattach the cover.

Replacing the low-beam headlight andhigh-beam headlight, version 2

1. Remove the relevant cover for the head-

light.

2. Push the bulb at the plug upwards against

the holder, see arrow, and pull it backwards

to remove.

3. Disconnect the plug from the light.

4. Connect the plug to the new bulb.

5. Insert the bulb into the holder at the top and

push it forwards to engage.

6. Reattach the cover.

Side and parking lights

5 watt bulb, W5W

1. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-

light.

2. Pull out the bulb holder, see arrow.

3. Pull out the bulb and change it.

4. Insert the bulb holder.

5. Reattach the cover.

Front turn indicators

21 watt bulb, PY21W

or PY21W Silver Vision

1. Open the flap in the wheel well, see Access

through the wheel well on page 207.

2. Turn the turn-indicator holder 1 to the left

and remove.

3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,

take out and change it.

4. Insert the turn-indicator holder 1.

5. Attach the flap to the wheel well.

Rear lights

Saloon

> Rear fog light:

H21W bulb, 21 watts

> Other lights:

P21W bulb, 21 watts

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 211: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 211/258

 209

The rear lights are divided into two parts. One

part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other

is in the side section.

1 Brake light

2 Parking/tail light

3 Flashing turn indicator

4 Reversing light

5 Tail light

6 Rear fog light*

Touring

> Rear fog light:

H21W bulb, 21 watts

> Other lights:

P21W bulb, 21 watts

The rear lights are divided into two parts. One

part is in the tailgate, the other is in the side sec-

tion.

1 Brake light

2 Parking/tail light

3 Flashing turn indicator

4 Reversing light

5 Tail light

6 Rear fog light*

Lights in the side section

Saloon

1. Using a screwdriver, pry off the cover in the

luggage area or release the turn-lock fas-

tener by turning it counter-clockwise and

remove the cover.

2. Loosen the bulb holder with clip, see arrow,

and pull out.

3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,

take out and change it.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly

clicks into place.

5. Reattach the cover in the luggage area.

Touring

1. Left-hand lights:

Open the flap on the left-hand side of the

luggage area.

Right-hand lights:

Open the luggage area floor panel. Turn the

screws on the cover, arrows 1, a quarter

turn and take out the cover, arrow 2.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 212: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 212/258

  R  e  p  l  a

  c  i  n  g  p  a  r  t  s

210

2. Loosen the bulb holder with clip, see arrow,

and pull out.

3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,

take out and change it.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly

clicks into place.

5. Reattach the cover in the luggage area.

Lights in the luggage compartment lid/tailgate

Saloon

1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the

luggage compartment lid using a screw-

driver and remove the trim.

2. Unfasten the bulb holder with clip, see

arrow, and remove.

3. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,

take out and change it.

4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly

clicks into place.

5. Reattach the trim of the luggage compart-

ment lid.

Touring

1. Press out one side of the cover at the clips

using a screwdriver, see arrows, and fold

the cover downward.

2. Fold back the foam insulating material.

3. Loosen the bulb holder with clip, see arrow,

and remove.

4. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,

take out and change it.

5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly

clicks into place.

6. Reattach the trim of the tailgate.

Licence plate lights

C5W bulb, 5 watts

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 213: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 213/258

 211

1. Using a screwdriver, push the light to the

right in the flap of the light housing.

2. Take out the light towards the left and

change the bulb.

3. Insert the light.

Centre brake light

This light uses LED technology. In the event of a

fault, please contact BMW Service or a work-shop that operates to BMW specifications and

has suitably trained personnel.

Changing a wheel

Your BMW is fitted with run-flat tyres as stand-

ard. This dispenses with the need to change a

wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.

If you need to continue driving with a damaged

tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre on page 89.

The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a circle

with the letters RSC on the sidewall, see Run-

flat tyres, page 196.

When fitting new tyres or changing over from

summer to winter tyres and vice versa, fit run-

flat tyres for your own safety. In the event of a

flat, no spare wheel is available. BMW Service

will be glad to advise you on this. See also New

wheels and tyres, page 196.

The tools for changing wheels are availa-

ble as optional accessories from BMW

Service.<

Jack mounting points

The jacking points are at the positions shown in

the illustration.

Thief-proof wheel studs*

1 Wheel stud for adapter

2 Adapter, in toolkit

Removing

1. Take the adapter 2 out of the toolkit andinsert it into the wheel stud.

2. Unscrew wheel stud 1.

After reattaching the wheel stud, remove the

adapter again.

The code number is embossed on the face of

the adapter. Please note down this number and

keep the note in a safe place for the event of the

adapter being lost.

Car battery

Maintenance

The battery needs no routine maintenance

whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid

it contains will normally last for the full operating

life of the battery in temperate climates. BMW

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 214: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 214/258

  R  e  p  l  a

  c  i  n  g  p  a  r  t  s

212

Service will gladly advise you on all matters

relating to batteries.

Recharging the battery

Recharge the battery only with the engine

stopped, via the connections in the engine

compartment. Connections, see Jump-starting 

on page 214.

Disposal

After changing the battery, have the old

one disposed of by BMW Service or take

it to an official collecting point. Batteries filled

with acid should be transported and stored

upright. Protect batteries against falling over

when in transit.<

Power failure

After a temporary power failure, the functions ofcertain equipment items may be restricted and

require reinitialising. Likewise, individual set-

tings may have been lost and need to be repro-

grammed:

> Time and date

These values must be updated, see

page 78.

> Radio

Stations may need to be memorised again,

see page 168.> Navigation system

Operability must be awaited, see page 130.

> Glass roof 

Under some circumstances, the roof can be

raised only. The system must be initialised.

Please contact your BMW Service.

> Panorama glass roof 

Under some circumstances, the roof can be

raised only. The system must be initialised.

Please contact your BMW Service.

> Seat and mirror memory

The positions must be memorised again,

see page 45.

> Inside mirror with digital compass

The system must be calibrated, see

page 107.

Fuses

Do not repair blown fuses or replace them

with fuses of different colours or ampere

ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires

can cause a fire in the vehicle.<

Open the cover in the glove box and remove.

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are

set in holders on the distributor box.

See the rear of the cover for information on fuse

assignment.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 215: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 215/258

 213

Mutual aid

Emergency call*

Prerequisites for an emergency call:

> Equipment with Business mobile phone

provision. This equipment specification

permits you to make an emergency call

even if a mobile phone has not been regis-

tered with the car.

> Radio readiness is switched on.

> The mobile phone network is received.

> The emergency call system is functional.

Although the emergency number may differ

from country to country, it is still possible to ini-

tiate an emergency call within most GSM net-

works using the button.It is a punishable offence to misuse the emer-

gency call system.

Initiating an emergency call

1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.

2. Press the SOS button for at least

2 seconds.

The LED in the button comes on. As soon as a

telephone connection with the general emer-

gency call centre has been established, theLED flashes.

When a cancellation inquiry appears on the

control display, you can cancel the emergency

call within 5 seconds.

If the situation permits, wait in the car until voice

contact has been established. You can then

provide detailed information about your situa-

tion.

In vehicles equipped with an activated BMW

Assist, a telephone connection with the BMW

Assist emergency call centre is established. Ifthe car's current position can be determined,

this information is transmitted to the emer-

gency call centre.

If the LED is flashing but the emergency call

centre cannot be heard over the hands-free

system, it is possible that the hands-free sys-

tem is malfunctioning. The emergency call cen-

tre may still be able to hear you, however.

If certain requirements are met, an emergency

call is automatically initiated after a seriousaccident. The automatic emergency call will not

be hindered by pressing the button.

For technical reasons, the emergency call

function cannot be ensured in certain

unfavourable conditions.<

Ending an emergency call

Press the button on the steering wheel, see

page 8.

Mobile Service

The BMW Group's Mobile Service (Emergency

Service) is there to assist you round the clock in

the event of a breakdown, including on week-

ends and public holidays.

The telephone numbers for Mobile Service in

your home country are in the Contact booklet.

In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist or Tele-

Service you can establish contact with theBMW Group's Mobile Service for breakdown

assistance directly via iDrive, see separate

Operating Instructions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 216: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 216/258

  M  u  t  u  a  l  a  i  d

214

First-aid pouch*

Certain items in the first-aid pouch have a lim-

ited useful life. Check the expiry dates of the

contents regularly and replace any items that

have expired.

Saloon

The first-aid pouch is located on the right-hand

side of the luggage area in a storage compart-ment.

Touring

The first-aid pouch is behind the cover on the

left-hand side of the luggage area.

Warning triangle*

Saloon

The warning triangle is located on the left-hand

side of the luggage area. Press the tab to take it

out.

Touring

The warning triangle is behind the cover on the

left-hand side of the luggage area. Press the tab

to take it out.

Jump-starting

If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's

engine can be started by using two jump leads

from another vehicle's battery. In the same way,

you can help to start another car. Use only leads

with fully insulated terminal clamps.

Do not touch any electrically live partswhen the engine is running, or a fatal acci-

dent may occur. Do not depart from the proce-

dure described below, otherwise personal

injury could result or one or both vehicles be

damaged.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 217: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 217/258

 215

Preparations

1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approx-

imately the same capacitance in Amp/h.

This information is on the battery.

2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.

3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.

The bodies of the two vehicles must notmake contact, otherwise there is the risk

of a short-circuit.<

Connecting the jump leads

Connect the jump leads in the correct

order to avoid sparks that could cause

injury.<

Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in

the engine compartment which acts as the bat-

tery's positive terminal, see also Engine com-partment overview on page 199. The cap is

marked with +.

1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-

nection up to remove.

2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+

 jump lead to the positive battery terminal or

a jump-starting connection on the donor

vehicle.

3. Connect the second terminal clamp on the

positive/+ jump lead to the positive battery

terminal or a jump-starting connection on

the vehicle to be started.

4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/–

 jump lead to the negative battery terminal or

the engine or body earth connection on the

donor vehicle.

Your BMW has a special nut to act as the

body earth or negative terminal.

5. Connect the second terminal clamp on the

negative/– jump lead to the negative battery

terminal or a ground/earth connection on

the engine or body of the vehicle to be

started.

Starting the engine

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and

allow it to run for a few minutes at a slightly

increased idle speed.

2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the

customary way.

If an initial attempt to start the engine fails,

wait several minutes until the flat battery

has been recharged to a slightly greater

degree.

3. Allow the engines to run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite

order from that in which they were originally

attached.

If necessary, check the battery and have it

recharged.

Do not use any spray products sold as

starting aids.<

Tow-starting, towing awayUsing the towing eye

The screw-in towing eye must always be car-

ried on the car. It can be screwed in at the front

or rear of the BMW.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 218: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 218/258

  M  u  t  u  a  l  a  i  d

216

Saloon: it is stored in the toolkit underneath the

cover on the right-hand side of the luggage

area, see page 205.

Touring: it is stored in the toolkit underneath

the cover on the left-hand side of the luggage

area, see page 205.

Use only the towing eye supplied with the

car, and make sure that it is screwed in

fully and is tight. Only use the towing eye for

towing on roads. Avoid lateral loads on the tow-

ing eye, e.g. do not raise the car at the towing

eye. Otherwise, the towing eye and the vehicle

could be damaged.<

Access to screw thread

Rectangular cover in bumper:

Press on the upper corners of the cover.

Front

Rear

Being towed

Make sure that the ignition is switched on,

see page 55, as otherwise low-beam

headlights, rear lights, turn indicators and wind-

screen wipers would not be available.

If the electrical system fails, do not attempt to

tow-start or tow away the car. The electrical

steering-wheel lock cannot be disengaged and

the car is not steerable. Jump-starting, see

page 214.

Servo assistance is not available when the

engine is not running. The steering and brakes

will require extra effort to operate. Active steer-

ing is not active and more extensive steering

wheel movements will be required.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-

ing on local regulations.

Manual gearbox

Gearshift lever in idle position.

Automatic gearbox

Selector lever in position N.

Changing selector lever positions, see page 58.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 70 km/h

or 40 mph and a towing distance of

150 km or 90 miles, otherwise the automatic

gearbox could be damaged.<

Towing methods

In some countries, it is prohibited to tow

another vehicle on public roads by means of a

towbar or towrope.

Familiarise yourself with the relevant legislation

in the country in question.

With towbar

The towing vehicle must not be lighter

than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may

be impossible to maintain control.<

The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on

the same side. If it is impossible to avoid attach-

ing the towbar at an angle, note the following:

> Towbar clearance may be restricted when

cornering.> The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is

attached offset.

Only attach the towbar to the towing

eyes. Attaching the towbar to other parts

of the vehicle can result in damage.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 219: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 219/258

 217

With towrope

Ensure that the towrope is taut when the towing

vehicle moves off.

For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as

these will help avoid sudden tensile loads.

Only attach the towrope to the towing eyes.

Attaching the towrope to other parts of the

vehicle can result in damage.<

With breakdown truck: vehicle withoutxDrive

Have the BMW transported by a breakdown

truck with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a

loading platform.

Do not raise the car at the towing eye or

by body or suspension components, oth-

erwise it could be damaged.<

With breakdown truck: vehicle withxDrive

Do not tow the BMW with xDrive with just

the front or rear axle raised; otherwise the

wheels can lock up and the transfer box can be

damaged.<

Have the BMW transported on a loading plat-

form only.

Tow-starting

If possible, you should use jump leads instead

of tow-starting to start the engine, see

page 214. On cars with catalytic converters,

tow-starting should only be used if the engine is

cold; on cars with automatic gearbox, it is not

possible to tow-start the engine.

If the car's electrical system fails, do not

attempt a tow start, otherwise you will not

be able to release the electrical steering wheel

lock and steer the car.<

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,

complying with local regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, see page 55.

3. Engage 3rd gear.

4. Keep the clutch depressed while tow-start-

ing the car, then gradually release the

clutch. Press the clutch down fully again assoon as the engine has started.

5. Halt in a suitable place, remove the towbar

or towrope and switch off the hazard warn-

ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent

Control HDC when tow-starting the vehi-

cle, page 87.<

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 220: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 220/258

Page 221: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 221/258

ReferenceThis section contains technical data, the sho

commands for the voice input system, and t

index, which is your quickest way of finding t

information you wa

Reference

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 222: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 222/258

  T  e  c  h

  n  i  c  a  l  d  a  t  a

220

Technical data

Dimensions

Saloon

All dimensions in mm. Smallest turning circle ∆: 11.0 m, 36 ft 1 in; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38 ft 9 in.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 223: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 223/258

 221

Touring

All dimensions in mm. Smallest turning circle ∆: 11.0 m, 36 ft 1 in; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38 ft 9 in.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 224: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 224/258

  T  e  c  h

  n  i  c  a  l  d  a  t  a

222

Weights

Saloon

318i 320i

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1435

(3164)

1435

(3164)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1465

(3230)

1465

(3230)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1880

(4145)

1880

(4145)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1910

(4211)

1910

(4211)

Front axle load limit kg

(lb)

895

(1973)

895

(1973)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1050

(2315)

1050

(2315)

Roof load kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Luggage area capacity

acc. to VDA test

litres

(cu ft)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1505

(3318)

1615

(3560)

1555

(3428)

1655

(3649)

1610

(3549)

1720

(3792)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1535

(3384)

1635

(3605)

1570

(3461)

1670

(3682)

1625

(3582)

1735

(3825)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1950

(4299)

2060

(4541)

2000

(4409)

2100

(4630)

2055

(4530)

2165

(4773)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1980

(4365)

2080

(4586)

2015

(4442)

2115

(4663)

2070

(4563)

2180

(4806)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 225: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 225/258

 223

Front axle load limit kg

(lb)

935

(2061)

1020

(2249)

950

(2094)

1035

(2282)

995

(2194)

1090

(2403)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1080

(2381)

1095

(2414)

1100

(2425)

1110

(2447)

1110

(2447)

1135

(2502)

Roof load kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Luggage area capacity

acc. to VDA test

litres

(cu ft)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

450

(15.9)

450

(15.9)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

318d 320d 325d 330d 330xd 335d

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1505

(3318)

1505

(3318)

1600

(3527)

1610

(3549)

1710

(3770)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

– 1520

(3351)

1610

(3549)

1625

(3582)

1725

(3803)

1655

(3649)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1950

(4299)

1950

(4299)

2045

(4508)

2055

(4530)

2155

(4751)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

– 1965

(4332)

2055

(4530)

2070

(4563)

2170

(4784)

2100

(4630)

Front axle load limit kg

(lb)

925

(2039)

925

(2039)

985

(2172)

995

(2194)

1085

(2392)

1015

(2238)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1080

(2381)

1080

(2381)

1105

(2436)

1110

(2447)

1125

(2480)

1120

(2469)

Roof load kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Luggage area capacity

acc. to VDA test

litres

(cu ft)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

460

(16.2)

450

(15.9)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 226: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 226/258

  T  e  c  h

  n  i  c  a  l  d  a  t  a

224

Touring

318i 320i

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1505

(3318)

1505

(3318)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1535

(3384)

1535

(3384)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1970

(4343)

1970

(4343)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

2000

(4409)

2000

(4409)

Front axle load limit kg

(lb)

900

(1984)

900

(1984)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1135

(2502)

1135

(2502)

Roof load kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Luggage area capacity

acc. to VDA test

litres

(cu ft)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1565

(3450)

1715

(3781)

1605

(3538)

1715

(3781)

1690

(3726)

1790

(3946)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1595

(3516)

1735

(3825)

1630

(3593)

1735

(3825)

1705

(3759)

1805

(3979)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

2030

(4475)

2180

(4806)

2080

(4586)

2180

(4806)

2155

(4751)

2255

(4971)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

2060

(4541)

2200

(4850)

2095

(4619)

2200

(4850)

2170

(4784)

2270

(5004)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 227: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 227/258

 225

Front axle load limit kg

(lb)

935

(2061)

1040

(2293)

955

(2105)

1045

(2304)

1005

(2216)

1090

(2403)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1160

(2557)

1180

(2601)

1175

(2590)

1190

(2623)

1190

(2623)

1200

(2646)

Roof load kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Luggage area capacity

acc. to VDA test

litres

(cu ft)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

450 –

1375

(15.9 –

48.5)

450 –

1375

(15.9 –

48.5)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

318d 320d 325d 330d 330xd 335d

Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1580

(3483)

1580

(3483)

1665

(3671)

1675

(3693)

1775

(3913)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

– 1595

(3516)

1675

(3693)

1690

(3726)

1790

(3946)

1720

(3792)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

2045

(4508)

2045

(4508)

2130

(4696)

2140

(4718)

2240

(4938)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

– 2060

(4541)

2140

(4718)

2155

(4751)

2255

(4971)

2185

(4817)

Front axle load limit kg

(lb)

940

(2072)

940

(2072)

990

(2183)

1000

(2205)

1085

(2392)

1020

(2249)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1160

(2557)

1160

(2557)

1190

(2623)

1200

(2646)

1200

(2646)

1200

(2646)

Roof load kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Luggage area capacity

acc. to VDA test

litres

(cu ft)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

460 –

1385

(16.2 –

48.9)

450 –

1375

(15.9 –

48.5)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 228: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 228/258

  T  e  c  h

  n  i  c  a  l  d  a  t  a

226

Towing a trailer

Saloon

318i 320i

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain

countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.

unbraked kg

(lb)

695

(1532)

695

(1532)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1250

(2756)

1400

(3086)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1400

(3086)

1500

(3307)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1600

(3527)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1600

(3527)

Trailer nose weight kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1165

(2568)

1165

(2568)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1955

(4310)

1955

(4310)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1985

(4376)

1985

(4376)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain

countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.

unbraked kg

(lb)

745

(1642)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1700

(3748)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1700

(3748)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 229: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 229/258

 227

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

Trailer nose weight kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1195

(2634)

1210

(2668)

1215

(2679)

1225

(2701)

1225

(2701)

1250

(2756)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

2025

(4464)

2135

(4707)

2075

(4575)

2175

(4795)

2130

(4696)

2240

(4938)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

2055

(4530)

2155

(4751)

2090

(4608)

2190

(4828)

2145

(4729)

2255

(4971)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

318d 320d 325d 330d 330xd 335d

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain

countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.

unbraked kg

(lb)

745

(1642)

745

(1642)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1600

(3527)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

>Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)– 1600

(3527)1800

(3968)1800

(3968)1800

(3968)1800

(3968)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

– 1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

Trailer nose weight kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Rear axle load limit kg(lb)

1195(2634)

1195(2634)

1220(2690)

1225(2701)

1240(2734)

1255(2767)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

2025

(4464)

2025

(4464)

2120

(4674)

2130

(4696)

2230

(4916)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

– 2040

(4497)

2130

(4696)

2145

(4729)

2245

(4949)

2175

(4795)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 230: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 230/258

  T  e  c  h

  n  i  c  a  l  d  a  t  a

228

Touring

318i 320i

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain

countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.

unbraked kg

(lb)

735

(1620)

750

(1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1250

(2756)

1400

(3086)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1400

(3086)

1500

(3307)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1600

(3527)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1600

(3527)

Trailer nose weight kg

(lb)

75

(165)

75

(165)

Rear axle load limit kg

(lb)

1250

(2756)

1250

(2756)

Permitted gross weight

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

2045

(4508)

2045

(4508)

> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

2075

(4575)

2075

(4575)

325i 325xi 330i 330xi 335i 335xi

Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain

countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.

unbraked kg

(lb)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

750

(1653)

braked on gradients up to 12Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1700

(3748)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)> Automatic gearbox kg

(lb)

1600

(3527)

1700

(3748)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

braked on gradients up to 8Ξ

> Manual gearbox kg

(lb)

1700

(3748)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

1800

(3968)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 231: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 231/258

Page 232: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 232/258

  T  e  c  h

  n  i  c  a  l  d  a  t  a

230

Filling capacities

Litres

(Imp. units)

Note

Fuel tank Fuel grade: page 193

> Petrol engine approx. 63

(13.9 gal)

> Diesel engine approx. 61(13.4 gal)

including a reserve of 

> Petrol engine approx. 8

(1.8 gal)

> Diesel engine approx. 6.5

(1.4 gal)

Window washer system Further details: page 62

including headlight washers approx. 6

(10.6 pt)

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 233: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 233/258

 231

Short commands for the voice inputsystem

Short commands enable you to perform certain

functions directly, irrespective of which menu

item is selected. Here you will find important

short commands for the voice input system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

Calling up assistance window 18   {Assistance window}

Selecting display in the assistance window 19   {Assistance window map north orientated},

{Assistance window map direction of travel},

{Assistance window arrow view},

{Assistance window perspective},

{Assistance window vehicle position},

{Assistance window journey computer} or

{Assistance window computer}

Changing scale in the assistance window 150   {Assistance window scale ... kilometres} or

{Assistance window scale ... metres}

Function Command

For more information, see the separate Operating Instructions.

Calling up BMW Assist   {BMW Assist}

"BMW Service", calling up services   {BMW Service}

Calling up BMW Contact   {BMW Contact}

Calling up "BMW Contact Numbers"   {BMW Contact Numbers}

Calling up Information Plus   {Info Service}

Calling up "Nearest BMW dealer"   {Nearest BMW dealer}

Calling up My Info   {My Info}

Calling up BMW Online   {BMW Online}

Calling up telephone   {Telephone}

Dialling phone number   {Dial number}

Displaying phone book   {A to Z}

Dialling from the phone book   {Call ...} or

{Dial name}

Displaying "Top 8"   {Top 8}

Redialling {Last number redial}

Displaying "Calls accepted"   {Calls accepted}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 234: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 234/258

  S  h  o  r  t  c

  o  m  m  a  n  d  s  f  o  r  t  h  e  v  o  i  c  e  i  n  p

  u  t  s  y  s  t  e  m

232

Navigation

On-board information

Displaying "Calls not accepted"   {Calls not accepted}

Displaying "Bluetooth"   {Bluetooth}

Calling up "BMW Mobile Service"   {BMW Mobile Service}

Function Command

Function Command

Calling up navigation 132   {Navigation}

Displaying present position   {Vehicle position}

Calling up "Address input"   {Address input}

Calling up "New destination"   {New destination}

Displaying "Destination input map"   {Destination input map}

Displaying address book   {From address book}

Displaying destination list   {Destination list}

Switching on route guidance   {Start guidance}

Switching off route guidance   {Guidance off }

Displaying route criteria   {Route criteria}

Switching on voice messages   {Navigation info on}

Switching off voice messages   {Navigation info off }

Repeating voice messages   {Repeat navigation info}

Displaying arrow view   {Arrow view}

Displaying map view   {Map},

{Map north oriented},

{Map indicating direction of travel} or{Perspective}

Calling up route   {Route menu}

Calling up "New route for"   {New route for}

Changing the scale   {Scale ... kilometres} or

{Scale ... metres}

Displaying roads or places along the route   {Route list}

Calling up traffic information   {Traffic information}

Calling up "TMC"   {TMC}

Function Command

Calling up "On-board Info" 72   {On-board info}

Displaying computer 72   {Computer}

Displaying journey computer 73   {Journey computer}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 235: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 235/258

 233

Entertainment

Calling up limit speed 82   {Limit}

Calling up stopwatch 82   {Stopwatch}

Activating speed limit 82   {Limit on}

Deactivating speed limit 82   {Limit off }

Function Command

Function Command

Tone settings 163   {Tone}

Switching on radio 166   {Radio on} or

{FM} or

{AM}

Calling up "FM" 166   {FM menu}

Calling up "AM" 166   {AM menu}

Calling up "All stations" 166   {FM all stations}

Selecting radio stations 166   {Station...} e.g. {Station BBC} or{Select station}

Calling up "Memorised stations" 166   {FM memorised stations},

{SW memorised},

{MW memorised} or

{LW memorised}

Selecting a memorised radio station 168   {Memorised station ...} 

e.g. {Memorised station 1}

Calling up "Manual frequency selection" 167   {FM manual frequency selection},

{SW manual},

{MW manual},

{LW manual} or

{Select frequency} or

{Frequency ... Megahertz}

Calling up radio stations with strongest received

signal 167

{SW autostore},

{MW autostore} or

{LW autostore}

Switching on digital radio 171   {Digital radio}

Calling up menu for digital radio 171   {Digital radio menu}

Calling up "Memorised stations" on the digitalradio 172

{Digital radio memorised stations}

Calling up "Manual frequency selection" on the

digital radio 173

{Digital radio manual frequency selection}

Calling up "Autostore" on the digital radio 172   {Digital radio Autostore}

Calling up "TP" 169   {TP}

Switching on traffic reports 170   {Traffic reports on}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 236: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 236/258

  S  h  o  r  t  c

  o  m  m  a  n  d  s  f  o  r  t  h  e  v  o  i  c  e  i  n  p

  u  t  s  y  s  t  e  m

234

Climate

 menu

Switching off traffic reports 170   {Traffic reports off }

Calling up CD player 176   {CD menu}

Switching on CD player 176   {CD}

Calling up CD changer 176   {CD changer menu}

Switching on CD changer 176   {CD changer}

Selecting CD in CD changer 176   {CD 1...6}Selecting track 177   {CD track ...}

Selecting CD and track in CD changer 177   {CD 1...6 track ...}

Calling up DVD 176   {DVD drive menu}

Switching on DVD 176   {DVD drive}

Selecting DVD track   {DVD drive track ...}

Selecting track 177   {Track ...}

Calling up TV 187   {Television Menu}

Switching on television 187   {Television}Adjusting the picture 188   {Picture}

Starting audio output for external audio

device 183

{Audio Aux}

Function Command

Function Command

Calling up "Air distribution" 99   {Air distribution}

Calling up "Automatic programs" 100   {Automatic programmes}

Function Command

Calling up menu   {Settings menu}

"Display off" 19   {Display off }

Calling up "Info sources"   {Info sources}

Calling up "Door locks" 27, 30   {Door locks}

Calling up "Settings"   {Settings}

Calling up "Steering wheel buttons" 48   {Steering wheel buttons}

Calling up "Light" 60, 93   {Light}

Calling up "Service" 75   {BMW Service}

Calling up "Service requirements" 76   {Service requirements}

Displaying "Check Control messages" 81   {Check Control messages}

Adjusting brightness of control display 83   {Brightness}

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 237: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 237/258

 235

Calling up "Units" 75   {Units}

Calling up "Languages" 83, 150   {Languages}

Calling up "Clock" 78   {Clock}

Calling up "Date" 79   {Date}

Calling up "Flat Tyre Monitor" 88   {RPA}

Calling up "PDC" 85   {PDC}Calling up "Traffic information settings" 154   {Traffic information settings}

Function Command

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 238: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 238/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

236

From A to Z

Index

"..." Identifies texts on the

control display for selecting

functions and refers you to

the page where these texts

are to be found.

A

ABS Anti-lock Brake

System 85

ACC, see Active Cruise

Control 65

"Accept as

destination" 140, 141"Accept current speed" 82

Accessories, see Your

individual vehicle 5

Accident, see Making an

emergency call 213

Activated charcoal filter for

automatic air-conditioning

system 102

Active Cruise Control 65

– indicator lights 67

– malfunction 68– selecting distance 66

– sensor 68

Active steering 90

– warning light 90

Adaptive Head Light 94

Additives

– coolant 202

– engine oil 201

"Address book" in

navigation 142Address for navigation

– deleting 143

– entering 132, 142

– memorising 142

– selecting 143

– storing current position 142

"Address input" 133

"Add to destination

list" 136, 138

Adjusting the interior

temperature, see Automatic

air conditioning 99

Adjusting the tone for audio

mode, see Tone

settings 163

Adjusting thigh support 42

Adjusting units of measure on

the control display 75

AHL, see Adaptive Head

Light 94

Airbags 90– deactivating 50

– indicator/warning light 91

– indicator light for front

passenger airbags 51

– reactivating 50

– safe seated position 41

Airbag switch, see Keyswitch

for front passenger

airbags 50

"Air circulation on / off" 49

Air conditioning mode– automatic air

conditioning 99

– ventilation 101

"Air distribution" 99

Air distribution

– automatic 100

– individual 99

Air flow rate 100

Air outlets 98

Air pressure, see Tyrepressures 195

Air recirculation, see

Recirculated-air mode 100

Air supply

– automatic air

conditioning 99

– ventilation 101

Alarm system 33

– avoiding false alarms 34

– interior movement

detector 34

– switching off alarm 33

– tilt alarm sensor 34

All-season tyres, see Winter

tyres 197

"All stations" displaying on

radio 166

All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 87

"AM", waveband 163, 166,

172, 173

Ambient air, see Recirculated-air mode 100

Anti-freeze

– coolant 202

– washer fluid 61

Anti-lock Brake System

ABS 85

Anti-theft alarm system, see

Alarm system 33

Approved engine oils 201

Aquaplaning 121

Armrest, see Centrearmrest 109

Arrival time, see Computer 72

Arrival time, see Starting route

guidance 147

Arrow view for navigation 148

"Arrow view" in

navigation 148

Ashtray

– front 110

– rear 111Assist, see separate

Operating Instructions

Assistance systems, see

Driving stability control

systems 85

Assistance window 18

– see iDrive 18

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 239: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 239/258

 237

AUC Automatic Air

Recirculation Control 100

Audio 162

– controls 162

– switching on/off 162

– tone settings 163

– volume 163

"Audio AUX" 163, 183, 184

– AUX-IN port 183– USB/audio interface 184

Audio device, external 109

Automatic

– air distribution 100

– air flow control 100

– channel memory 188

– cruise control 62, 63, 65

– driving lights control 92

– memorising of stations 167

Automatic air-conditioning

system 98– automatic air

distribution 100

– settings via iDrive 99

Automatic Air Recirculation

Control AUC 100

Automatic-dim mirrors 48

"Automatic FM

changeover" 175

Automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 57

– interlock 58

– overriding selector-lever

lock 59

– shiftlock, see Changing

selector lever positions 58

Automatic high beams and

low beams, see High-Beam

Assistant 95

Automatic low-beam

headlights, see High-Beam

Assistant 95"Automatic off" 46

"Automatic programs" with

automatic air-conditioning

system 100

Automatic station

search 167, 173

AUTO program for automatic

air-conditioning system 100

"Autostore"

– for radio 168

– for TV 188

"Autostore", digital radio 172

Auxiliary heater, see

Independent heating

system 102

AUX-IN

– port 109AUX-IN port 183

Average fuel consumption 72

– adjusting units 75

Average speed 72

Avoiding a congestion 156

Avoiding false alarms 34

Avoiding motorways in

navigation 145

Axle load limits, see

Weights 222

B

Backrest contour, see Lumbar

support 43

Backrests, see Seat

adjustment 42

Backrest width adjustment 43

Back seats

– see Rear seats 44

Balance, tone setting 164

"Band III" 174

"Band III + L" 174

"Band L" 174

Bar, see Towing methods 216

Bass, see Tone settings 164

Bass, see Treble and

Bass 164

Battery 211

– disposal 36, 212

– jump-starting 214

– recharging 212– remote control 26

– temporary power failure 212

Battery change

– remote control 36

– remote control for car 36

Battery change, remote

control for independent

ventilation/heating

system 104

Being towed 216

Belts, see Seat belts 46

Belt tensioner, see Seat

belts 46

Biodiesel, see Dieselengine 193

Blower, see Air flow

control 100

Bluetooth, see separate

Operating Instructions

BMW Assist, see separate

Operating Instructions

BMW homepage 4

BMW Maintenance

System 203

BMW Online, see separateOperating Instructions

BMW webpage 4

Bottle holders, see Drinks

holders 110

Brake assist, see Dynamic

Brake Control DBC 86

Brake discs 122

– brakes 120

– running in 120

Brake fluid, see Next Service

indicator 75

Brake lights

– bulb changing 209

– two-stage 90

Brake pads 120

– running in 120

Brakes 120

– ABS 85

– BMW Maintenance

System 203

– handbrake 57– Next Service indicator 75

– running in 120

Brakes, see Safe braking 121

Brake system

– BMW Maintenance

System 203

– disc brakes 122

– running in 120

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 240: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 240/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

238

Breakdown Service, see

Mobile Service 213

Bridging, see Jump-

starting 214

"Brightness" for TV 188

"Brightness" in control

display 83

Brightness of the control

display 83"Building number" in

destination input 135

Bulb changing, see Lights and

bulbs 206

Button for starting the engine,

see Start/stop button 55

Buttons on the steering

wheel 9

C

Calling up e-mails, see BMW

Online, separate Operating

Instructions

Can holders, see Drinks

holders 110

Capacity

– fuel tank, see Filling

capacities 230

– luggage area, see

Weights 222

Car

– battery 211

– care, see booklet Looking

after your car

– laying up out of use, see

booklet Looking after your

car

– loads 122

– stopping 56

– washing, see booklet

Looking after your car– weight 222

Car's position, see Displaying

present position 157

Caravan-towing, see Towing a

trailer 124

Car care, see booklet Looking

after your car

Care, see booklet Looking

after your car

Care products, see booklet

Looking after your car

Car jack 211

Car key, see Integrated key/

remote control 26

Carpet care, see booklet

Looking after your carCar phone

– installed position, see

Centre armrest 109

– see separate Operating

Instructions

Car radio, see Radio 166

Car wash, see booklet

Looking after your car

Car washes 122

– see booklet Looking after

your car– with convenient access 35

Catalytic converter, see Hot

exhaust system 120

CBS Condition Based

Service 203

"CD" 163, 176

CD changer 176

– compressed audio files 176

– controls 162

– fast forward, reverse 180

– installed position 180

– random play 179

– repeating track 179

– sampling tracks 178

– selecting CDs 177

– selecting track 177

– switching on/off 162

– tone settings 163

– volume 163

CD player 176

– compressed audio files 176

– controls 162

– fast forward, reverse 180

– random play 179

– repeating track 179

– sampling tracks 178

– selecting track 177

– switching on/off 162– tone settings 163

– volume 163

"Central locking" 28

Central locking 27

– convenient access 34

– from inside 30

– from outside 27

Centre armrest 109

Centre brake light

– bulb changing 211

Centre console, see Aroundthe centre console 12

Changing a wheel 211

Changing bulbs, see Lights

and bulbs 206

Changing the country for

TV 188

Changing the TV

standard 188

Chassis number, see Engine

compartment 199

Check Control 80

"Check Control

messages" 82

Child restraint systems 50

Child safety 50

Child safety catches 54

Child seat mountings,

ISOFIX 52

Child seats, see Child

safety 50

Chrome parts, care, seebooklet Looking after your

car

Cigarette lighter, see

Lighter 110

"City" in destination input 133

Cleaning, see booklet Looking

after your car

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 241: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 241/258

 239

Cleaning headlights 61

– washer fluid 62

Cleaning the windows 60

– capacity, reservoir 230

– rear window 61

– washer fluid 62

– washer fluid reservoir 62

– washer jets 61

Clearance warning, see ParkDistance Control PDC 84

"Climate" 99

Climatic comfort

windscreen 121

"Clock" 79

Clock 70

– 12 hour/24 hour mode 79

– setting time 78

"Clock / Date" 78, 79, 80

Clutch, running in 120

Coat hooks 109Cockpit 8

Cold start, see Starting the

engine 56

Combined instrument, see

Instrument cluster 10

Comfort/convenience, see

Around the centre

console 12

Compact Disc, see

– CD changer 176

– CD player 176

Compartment for remote

control, see Ignition lock 55

Compass 107

"Computer" 73

Computer

– displays on the control

display 72

– hour signal 79

Computer, see iDrive 14, 72

"Concert hall", tonesettings 165

Condensation, see Car

parked 122

Condition Based Service

CBS 203

Configuring settings, see

Personal Profile 26

Confirmation signals for

locking/unlocking vehicle 29

Congestion

– avoiding 156

– displaying traffic

information 153

– traffic information

announcements 169

Connecting vacuum cleaner,see Connecting electrical

appliances 111

Conserving energy while

driving, see Energy

Control 71

Consumption, see Average

fuel consumption 72

Consumption display

– average consumption 72

– Energy Control 71

"Continue guidance?" 148"Contrast" for TV 188

Control centre, see iDrive 14

Control display

– brightness 83

– changing language 83

– switching on/off 19

Control display, see iDrive 14

Controller, see iDrive 14

Controls and displays 8

Control unit, see iDrive 14

Convenient access 34

– changing battery 36

– what to do in an automatic

car wash 35

Convenient operation

– glass roof 28

– windows 28

Convertible

– loading 122

– securing the load 123

Coolant 202– checking level 202

Coolant temperature 71

Cooling, maximum 100

Cooling fluid, see Coolant 202

Cooling function on/off 101

Cooling system, see

Coolant 202

Copyright 2

Cornering lights, see Adaptive

Head Light 94

Correct tyres 196

"Country" in destination

input 133

Cross-hairs for navigation 138

Cruise control

– active 65

– for 318i, 320i, 318d, 320d 62– malfunction 64

– with brake function in 325i,

330i, 330d 63

Cup holders, see Drinks

holders 110

Current fuel consumption, see

Energy Control 71

Current position

– displaying 157

– entering 142

– storing 142

D

"DAB", digital radio 171, 173

Dashboard, see Instrument

cluster 10

Dashboard lighting, see

Instrument lighting 96

Data, technical

– dimensions 220

– filling capacities 230

– weights 222

"Date" 80

Date

– setting 79

– setting format 80

"Date format" 80

Daytime driving lights 93

"Daytime running

lights" 93, 96

DBC Dynamic BrakeControl 86

DCC, see Cruise control 325i,

330i, 330d 63

Deadlocking, see Locking 28

Deadlocks 27

"Delete address book" in

navigation 144

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 242: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 242/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

240

"Delete data" in

navigation 144

Designation

– run-flat tyres 196

Destination address

– deleting 143

– entering 132, 136

Destination in navigation

– destination list 141– entering 132

– home address 144

– manual input 132, 136

– memorising 142

– selecting from address

book 143

– selecting from map 138

– selecting via Information 139

– selecting via language 136

"Destination input map" 138

Destination list for navigationsystem 141

Destinations last driven to 141

"Details" for audio mode 185

Diesel engine, checking oil

level 199

Diesel fuel 193

Diesel particle filter 120

Digital clock 70

Digital compass 107

Dimensions 220

Dipstick, engine oil 199

Direction indicators, see

Flashing turn indicators 60

Direction instructions, see

Voice output 150

"Direct operation" 103

Directory in navigation, see

Address book 142

Display, see iDrive controls 14

Displaying "Memorised

stations" on the radio 166Display lighting, see

Instrument lighting 96

"Display off" 19

"Display on / off" 49

Displays

– on the control display 14

Displays, see Instrument

cluster 10

Displays and controls 8

Disposal

– battery for remote control 36

– car battery 212

– coolant 202

– remote control battery for

independent heating/

ventilation system 104

Distance control, see ActiveCruise Control 65

Distance remaining, see

Remaining operating

range 72

Distance remaining to service,

see Next Service

indicator 75

"Distance to dest." 73

Door entry lighting, see

Interior lights 97

Door key, see Remote controlwith integrated key 26

Door lock 29

"Door locks" 28, 29, 30, 76

Door mirrors 47

Doors, manual operation 30

Doors, unlocking and locking

– confirmation signals 29

– from inside 30

– from outside 27

Downhill gradients 121

Draught-free ventilation 101

Drawbar load, see Nose

weight 125

Drinks holders 110

Drive-off assistant 88

Driving hints 120

Driving lights, see Side lights/

low-beam headlights 92

Driving lights control,

automatic 92

Driving on right 122Driving stability control

systems 85

Driving through water 121

Dry air, see Cooling

function 101

DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 86

DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 86

– indicator/warning light 86

DVD for navigation 130

Dynamic Brake Control

DBC 86

"Dynamic route" in

navigation 145

"Dynamic route planning" innavigation 156

Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 86

– indicator/warning light 86

Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 86

– indicator/warning light 87

E

EBV Electronic Brake ForceDistribution 85

Eject button, see Buttons on

CD player 162

Electric

– seat adjustment 42

Electrical fault

– door lock 30

– driver's door 30

– fuel filler flap 192

– glass roof 38

– luggage compartment lid/

tailgate 31

– panorama glass roof 39

Electric seat adjustment 42

Electric seats 42

Electric steering wheel lock

– with convenient access 34

Electric steering-wheel

lock 55

Electric windows, see

Windows 36Electronic Brake Force

Distribution EBV 85

Electronic oil level check 200

Electronic Stabilisation

Program ESP, see Dynamic

Stability Control DSC 86

Emergency call 213

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 243: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 243/258

 241

Emergency operation

– fuel filler flap, manual

release 192

Emergency operation,

automatic gearbox, see

Overriding selector-lever

lock 59

Emergency operation, see

Closing manually– glass roof 38

– panorama glass roof 39

Emergency operation, see

Manual operation

– door lock 30

Emergency release

– luggage compartment lid

from inside 32

Emergency Service, see

Mobile Service 213

Energy Control 71Engine

– overheated, see Coolant

temperature 71

– running in 120

– starting 56

– starting, convenient

access 34

– stopping 56

Engine compartment 199

Engine compartment lid 198

Engine coolant, see

Coolant 202

Engine oil

– adding 201

– additives, see Approved

engine oils 201

– alternative oil grades 202

– approved engine oils 201

– BMW Maintenance

System 203

– checking level 199– dipstick 199

– filling capacity 230

– intervals between changes,

see Next Service

indicator 75

"Engine oil level" 201

Engine start, see Starting the

engine 56

Entering destination 133

Entering destination

country 133

Entering the house number or

 junction 135

Entering the street 134

"Entertainment" 163

Environmentally-responsible

driving, see EnergyControl 71

"Equaliser", see Tone

settings 165

Equaliser, see Tone

settings 165

Error messages, see Check

Control 80

ESP Electronic Stabilisation

Program, see Dynamic

Stability Control DSC 86

"Exclude ferries" innavigation 145

"Exclude motorways" in

navigation 145

"Exclude toll roads" in

navigation 145

Exhaust system, see Hot

exhaust system 120

Expanding the luggage

area 113

External audio device 109

External audio device, see

AUX-IN port 183

Eyes

– for lashing loads 123

– for tow-starting and towing

away 215

F

Fader, tone setting 164

Failure messages, see CheckControl 80

Failure of an electrical

consumer 212

False alarm

– avoiding false alarms 34

– switching off alarm 33

Fasten seat belts, see Seat

belts 46

Fastest route in

navigation 144

Fast forward

– CD changer 180

– CD player 180

Fast reverse

– CD changer 180

– CD player 180

"Fast route" in navigation 145Fault

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 59

– door lock 30

– fuel filler flap 192

– glass roof 38

– luggage compartment lid/

tailgate 31

– panorama glass roof 39

– tyres 89

Fault messages, see CheckControl 80

Favourites, see Sorting

stations with the radio 169

Favourites buttons 19

"Favourites" displaying on

radio 169

Filling capacities 230

Filter

– see Micro-filter/activated

charcoal filter for automatic

air-conditioning system 102

Fine wood, see booklet

Looking after your car

First-aid pouch 214

Fixture for remote control, see

Ignition lock 55

Fixture for telephone or

mobile phone

– see Snap-in adapter in

centre armrest storage

compartment 109Flashing turn indicators 60

– bulb changing 208

Flashing when locking/

unlocking 29

Flat tyre, see Condition of

tyres 195

Floods, see Driving through

water 121

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 244: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 244/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

242

Floor carpets, rugs, see

booklet Looking after your

car

"FM", waveband 163, 166

Fog lights 96

– indicator light 11, 96

Folding in mirrors, before

entering a car wash 47

Folding rear-seatbackrest 113

Folding up the floor panel 115

Footbrake, see Safe

braking 121

Footwell lights, see Interior

lights 97

For your own safety 5

Four-wheel-drive, see

xDrive 87

"Frequency selection" 174

Frequency selection,manual 167

Front airbags 90

Front passenger airbags

– deactivating 50

– reactivating 50

Frost protection

– coolant 202

– washer fluid 61

Fuel 193

– additives 194

– average consumption 72

– gauge 71

– grade 193

– leaded 193

– see Average fuel

consumption 72

– see Fuel grade 193

– tank capacity, see Filling

capacities 230

Fuel, adding 192

Fuel display, see Fuelgauge 71

Fuel-efficient driving, see

Energy control 71

Fuel filler flap 192

– unlocking in the event of an

electrical fault 192

Fuel level 71

Fuses 212

G

Garage door opener, see

Integrated universal remote

control 105

Gearbox

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 57

– manual gearbox 57– overriding selector-lever

lock for automatic gearbox

with Steptronic 59

Gearbox interlock

– see Changing selector lever

positions 58

– see P Park 58

Gear indicator, automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 58

Gearshift lever

– automatic gearbox withSteptronic 58

– manual gearbox 57

Gearshifts

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 58

– manual gearbox 57

General driving hints 120

Glass roof, electric 37

– closing after electrical

fault 38

– convenient operation 28, 29

– initialising 37

– opening, closing 37

– power failure 37

– raising 37

– remote control 28

– trap protection 37

Glove box 108

– rechargeable hand lamp 109

GPS navigation, see

Navigation system 130Grilles 98

Gross weight, see

Weights 222

Ground lights, see Interior

lights 97

H

Halogen headlights

– bulb changing 206

– driving on left/right 122

– manual beam throw

adjustment 94

Handbrake 57

– indicator light 57Hands-free unit 12

Hazard warning flashers 12

HDC Hill Descent Control 87

Head-level airbags 90

Headlight adjustment, see

Rule of the road 122

Headlight beam throw

adjustment 94

– automatic, xenon

headlights 94

Headlight courtesy delayfeature 93

Headlight cover 206

Headlight flasher 60

– indicator light 9, 11

Headlights

– bulb changing 206

– care, see booklet Looking

after your car

Head restraints 43

– front, removing 44

– rear, removing 44

– safe seated position 41

Heating

– mirrors 47

– rear window 101

– residual heat 101

– seats 45

Heating and ventilation, see

Climate 98

Heating while at a standstill,

see Using residual heat 101Heavy loads, see Loading 122

Height, see Dimensions 220

Height adjustment

– seats 42

– steering wheel 48

High-Beam Assistant 95

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 245: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 245/258

 243

High-beam headlights 94

– bulb changing 206

– headlight flasher 94

– indicator light 11

High beams and low beams,

automatic, see High-Beam

Assistant 95

Hill Descent Control HDC 87

Hints for driving, see Drivinghints 120

Holders for drinks 110

Home address 144

"Home address" in

navigation 144

"Home lights" 93

Hooks for shopping bags 114

Horn 8, 9

Hot exhaust system 120

"Hour memo" 79

Hydraulic brake assist, seeDynamic Brake Control

DBC 86

I

Ice warning, see Outside

temperature warning 70

Icy roads, see Outside

temperature warning 70

ID3 tag, see Information on the

track 178

iDrive 14

– adjusting brightness 83

– assistance window 18

– automatic air-conditioning

system 99

– changing date and time 78

– changing language 83

– changing units of measure

and form of expression 75– confirming a selection or

input 17

– controls 14

– displays, menus 15

– menu guidance 15

– operating principle 14

– overview 14

– selecting a menu item 17

– start menu 15

– status information 18

– switching menu pages 17– symbols 16

Ignition 55

– switched off 56

– switched on 55

Ignition key, see Remote

control with integrated

key 26

Ignition key position 1, see

Radio readiness 55

Ignition key position 2, see

Ignition on 55

Ignition lock 55

i menu 15

Imitation leather, see booklet

Looking after your car

Imprint 2

"Independent heater" 103

"Independent mode" 103

"Independent ventilation" 103

Independent ventilation/

heating system 102– activating switch-on

times 103

– pre-selecting switch-on

times 103

– remote control 104

– switching on and off

directly 103

Indicator and warning

lights 11

Individual air distribution 99

Individually programmable

buttons on steering

wheel 48

Inflation pressures, see Tyre

pressures 195

"Info on destination" 142Information

– on another place 139

– on country 139

– on current location 139

– on destination 139

"Information" in

navigation 140

Information menu, see

i menu 15

"Info sources" 76

Infrared reflectingwindscreen, see Climatic

comfort windscreen 121

Initialising

– active steering 90

– after power failure 212

– compass, see

Calibrating 107

– glass sunroof 37

– panorama glass roof 39

– Run Flat Indicator RPA 88

Inside mirror 47, 48

– automatic-dim 48

– compass 107

Installed position

– CD changer 180

– telephone 109

Instructions from navigation

system, see Voice

messages 150

Instrument cluster 10

Instrument lighting 96Instrument panel, see

Cockpit 8

Integrated key 26

Integrated universal remote

control 105

Interesting destination for

navigation 139

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 246: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 246/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

244

Interior lights 97

– remote control 28

Interior movement

detector 34

Interlock, see Taking out the

remote control 58

Intermittent wiper

operation 60

"Interm. time" 83Internet-based services, see

BMW Online, separate

Operating Instructions

Internet site, BMW 4

ISOFIX child seat

mountings 52

J

Jack

– mounting points 211Jacking points 211

"Journey computer" 73

Journey computer 73

Joystick, see iDrive 14

Jump-starting 214

Junction input 134

Kerb weight, see Weights 222

Key, see Integrated key/

remote control 26

Keyless Go, see Convenient

access 34

Keyless locking and

unlocking, see Convenient

access 34

Key Memory, see Personal

Profile 26

Keyswitch for front passenger

airbags 50Kick-down 58

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 58

Knock control 193

L

Language, changing on the

control display 83

"Language / Units" 75

"Language / Units" in

navigation 131, 151

"Languages" in

navigation 131, 151"Languages" on the control

display 83

Lap-and-shoulder belt, see

Seat belts 46

Lashings, see Securing the

load 123

Last destinations, see

Destination list 141

"Last seat pos." 46

Laying up car out of use, see

booklet Looking after yourcar

Leaded fuel 193

Leather care, see booklet

Looking after your car

LED light-emitting diodes 206

Length, see Dimensions 220

Licence plate light, bulb

changing 210

"Light" 60

Light-emitting diodes

LED 206

Lighter 110

– connecting electrical

appliances 111

Lighting

– car, see Lights 92

– instruments 96

– lights and bulbs 206

Light metal-alloy wheels, care,

see booklet Looking after

your carLights

– automatic driving lights

control 92

– High-Beam Assistant 95

– see High-Beam Assistant 95

– side lights/low-beam

headlights 92

Lights and bulbs, bulb

change 206

Light switch 92

"Limit" 82

Limit, see Speed limit 82

Load area, see Luggage

area 112

Loads

– car 122– loading 122

– securing 123

– trailer 125

Load-securing equipment,

see Securing the load 123

Location

– drive for navigation DVD and

audio CD 130

Lockable wheel studs, see

Thief-proof wheel studs 211

"Lock button" 28Locking

– adjusting confirmation

signal 29

– from inside 30

– from outside 27, 28

– without remote control, see

Convenient access 34

Longlife oils

– alternative oil grades 202

– approved engine oils 202

Low-beam headlights 92

– automatic 92

– bulb changing 206

– headlight beam throw

adjustment 94

Low fuel level, see Fuel

gauge 71

Low fuel level warning light 71

Luggage area 112

– capacity 222

– convenient access 35– folding up the floor

panel 115

– light, see Interior lights 97

– opening from outside 31

– partition net 113

– roller-blind cover 112

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 247: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 247/258

 245

Luggage area lid, see

Luggage compartment lid/

tailgate 31

Luggage area net, see

Partition net 113

Luggage compartment lid 31

– convenient access 35

– emergency operation, see

Opening manually 31– emergency release

device 32

– opening from outside 31

– opening manually 31

– remote control 28

Luggage rack, see Roof

rack 123

Lumbar support 43

LW waveband 166

M

M+S tyres, see Winter

tyres 197

Maintenance, see Service

Booklet

Maintenance system 203

Making a call, see Telephone

Operating Instructions

"Manual frequency selection",

digital radio 172

"Manual frequency selection"

for radio 167

Manual gearbox 57

Manual operation

– door lock 30

– driver's door 30

– fuel filler flap 192

– gearbox interlock, automatic

gearbox 59

– glass roof 38

– luggage compartment lid/tailgate 31

– panorama glass roof 39

Manual operation, automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 59

Map

– changing the scale 150

– destination input 138

"Map, indicating dir. of

travel" 149

"Map north-oriented" 149

Master key, see Remote

control with integrated

key 26

Maximum cooling 100

Maximum speed

– with trailer 126– with winter tyres 197

Measurements, see

Dimensions 220

"Memorised stations", digital

radio 172

Memorising radio

stations 168

Memorising the seat position,

see Seat and mirror

memory 45

Memory, see Seat and mirrormemory 45

MENU button 14

Menus

– control display 15

Menus, see iDrive 14

Message list, traffic

information 154

Micro-filter

– BMW Maintenance

System 203

– for automatic air-

conditioning system 102

Micro-filter/activated charcoal

filter

– BMW Maintenance

System 203

Microphone

– telephone 12

– voice input 12

Mirrors 47

– heating 47– inside mirror 48

– mirror memory, see Seat and

mirror memory 45

– outside mirrors 47

– parking position function 47

Mobile communication

equipment 121

Mobile phone

– installed position, see

Centre armrest 109

– see separate Operating

Instructions

Mobile phone, installed

position, see Centre

armrest 109

Mobile phone, see separateOperating Instructions

Mobile phones, use inside the

car, see Mobile

communication

equipment 121

Mobile Service 213

Modifications, technical, see

For your own safety 5

Monitor, see iDrive

controls 14

Motorways, see Routecriteria 145

MP3, see Compressed audio

files 176

Multifunctional steering

wheel, see Buttons on

steering wheel 9

Multi-function lever

– see Flashing turn indicators/

headlight flasher 60

Multi-function switch

– see Wiper system 60

Multimedia screen, see

iDrive 14

Music tracks, see Tracks 177

"Mute on / off" 49

MW waveband 166

N

"Navigation" 132, 139

Navigation announcements,see Switching voice

messaging on/off 150

Navigation disc drive, installed

position 130

Navigation DVD 130

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 248: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 248/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

246

Navigation system 130

– address book 142

– adjusting volume 151

– avoiding sections of a

route 152

– calling up 132

– changing route 151

– destination input 132

– destination list 141– displaying present

position 157

– displaying the route 148

– ending/resuming route

guidance 147

– entering a destination

address manually 132, 136

– last destinations 141

– navigation DVD 130

– route guidance in the

assistance window 130– route list 150

– searching for a special

destination 139

– selecting destination via

Information 139

– selecting destination via

map 138

– selecting route criteria 144

– starting route guidance 147

– switching off, see Ending/

resuming route

guidance 147

– voice messages 150

Neck restraints, see Head

restraints 43

Nets, see Storage

compartments 109

"New address" in

navigation 142

"New destination" 132, 138

New remote control forindependent heating/

ventilation system 104

"New route for" 152

New transmitter for

independent heating/

ventilation system 104

New tyres 196

"Next entertainment

source" 49

Next Service indicator 75

North-oriented route map 149

Nose weight 125, 226

"No Signal" 172

Nozzles 98

Nozzles, see Ventilation 101

Nylon rope, see Towrope 217

O

OBD socket, see Socket for

on-board diagnosis 203

Octane numbers, see Fuel

grade 193

Odometer – distance

recorder 70

Oil, see Engine oil 199

Oil consumption 199Oil level 199

Old batteries, see

Disposal 212

On-board computer, see

Computer 72

"On-board Info" 72

"On destination" 139, 140

Online, see separate

Operating Instructions

"On location" 139, 140

Opening, see Unlocking 34

Opening and closing

– convenient access 34

– from the inside 30

– from the outside 27

– via the door lock 29

– via the remote control 27

Operating principle, iDrive 14

Orientation menu, see Start

menu 15

"Other place" innavigation 139, 140

Outlets

– see Ventilation 101

Outside-air mode

– automatic air-conditioning

system 100

Outside mirrors

– adjusting 47

– automatic-dim 48

– automatic heating 47

– folding in and out 47

– towing a trailer 126

Outside temperature

display 70

– changing units ofmeasure 75

– in computer 75

Outside temperature

warning 70

Overheated engine, see

Coolant temperature 71

Overriding selector-lever

lock 59

P

Paintwork care, see booklet

Looking after your car

Panorama glass roof 38

– closing after electrical

fault 39

– comfort position 39

– convenient operation 28

– initialising 39

– opening, closing 39

– power failure 39

– raising 38

– remote control 28

– trap protection 39

Park Distance Control PDC 84

Parking aid, see Park Distance

Control PDC 84

Parking assistant, see Park

Distance Control 84

Parking brake, see

Handbrake 57

Parking lights 94– bulb changing 208

Parking position function 47

Particle filter, see Diesel

particle filter 120

Partition net 113

Parts and accessories, see

Your individual vehicle 5

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 249: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 249/258

Page 250: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 250/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

248

Remote control for

independent ventilation/

heating system 104

– battery changing 104

– new remote control 104

Renewing tyres 196

"Repeat directory" for audio

mode 179

"Repeat" for audio mode 179"Repeat track" for audio

mode 179

Replacement fuses, see

Spare fuses 212

Replacement remote

control 26

Reset, see Resetting tone

settings 165

"Reset" for stopwatch 83

"Reset" for tone settings 165

Residual heat 101Restraint systems

– for children 50

– see Seat belts 46

Returning end-of-life vehicles,

see Recycling 204

Reverse gear

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 58

– manual gearbox 57

Reversing lights

– bulb changing 209, 210

Revolution counter 70

RME rapeseed methyl

ester 193

Road map 149

Roadworthiness test, see

Next Service indicator 75

Roller-blind

– roller sunblinds 108

Roller sunblinds 108

RON, see Fuel grade 193Roof load 222

Roof rack 123

Rope, see Tow-starting and

towing away 217

Rotary/pushbutton control,

see iDrive 14

Route 144

– avoiding sections 152

– changing 151

– displaying arrow view 148

– displaying map view 149

– displaying streets and

towns/cities 150

– displaying towns 150

– displays 148– list 150

– selecting 144

– selecting criteria 144

Route, see Displaying

route 148

Route guidance 147

– aborting voice messages 49

– altering route

specifications 144

– avoiding sections of a

route 152– changing course of a

route 151

– displaying the route 148

– distance and arrival time 147

– ending/resuming 147

– starting 147

– voice messages 150

– volume of voice

messages 151

Route instructions, see Route

guidance by voice

messages 150

RPA, see Run Flat Indicator 88

RSC Runflat System

Component, see Run-flat

tyres 196

Rubber parts, see booklet

Looking after your car

Rule of the road, headlight

adjustment 122

Run Flat Indicator RPA 88– indicating a flat tyre 89

– indicator/warning light 89

– initialising the system 88

– malfunction 90

– snow chains 88

– system limits 88

Runflat System Component

RSC, see Run-flat tyres 196

Run-flat tyres 196

– flat tyre 89

– new tyres 196

– renewing 196

– resuming a journey despite a

damaged tyre 89

– Run Flat Indicator 89

– tyre pressure 195

– winter tyres 197Running in 120

Running in the final drive, see

Engine and final drive 120

S

Safe seated position 41

– with airbags 41

– with head restraint 41

– with seat belt 41

Safety lock buttons, doors,see Locking 30

Safety switch for rear

windows 37

Safety systems

– airbags 90

– Anti-lock Brake System

ABS 85

– brake system 86

– driving stability control

systems 85

– Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 86

– seat belts 46

Safety tyres, see Run-flat

tyres 196

"Save address" in

navigation 142

"Save" for radio 168

Saving current position 142

Scale change in navigation

system 150"Scan"

– sampling radio stations 167

– sampling tracks on CD 178

"Scan all" for audio mode 179

"Scan directory" for audio

mode 179

Screen, see iDrive controls 14

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 251: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 251/258

 249

Screw thread for towing

eye 216

Search

– CD changer 178

– CD player 178

– radio 167

– TV channels 188

Seat adjustment

– electrical 42– mechanical 42

Seat and mirror memory 45

Seat-belt height

adjustment 46

Seat belt reminder, see

'Fasten seat belts'

reminder 46

Seat belts 46

– 'Fasten seat belts'

reminder 46

– damage 47– indicator/warning light 46

– safe seated position 41

Seat belts, care, see booklet

Looking after your car

Seat heating 45

Seats 42

– adjusting 42

– electrical adjustment 42

– heating 45

– memorising position, see

Seat and mirror memory 45

– memory, see Seat and mirror

memory 45

– safe seated position 41

Securing, vehicle

– from inside 30

– from outside 27

Securing the load 116, 123

Selecting a country for

navigation 133

Selecting an audio source 162Selecting distance for Active

Cruise Control 66

Selecting menu items 17

Selector lever

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 58

Selector lever interlock, see

Changing selector lever

positions, shiftlock 58

Selector lever positions

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 58

"Service" 76, 201

Service, see Mobile

Service 213Service Booklet 203

Service car, see Mobile

Service 213

Service data in the remote

control 203

Service Interval indicator, see

Condition Based Service

CBS 203

"Service

requirements" 76, 201

"Set date" 80"Set" for audio mode 163

"Set time" 79

Settings

– changing on the control

display 83

– clock, 12h/24h mode 79

– date format 80

– language 83

Settings and information 74

"Settings" for unlocking 27

Settings menu, see i menu 15

Setting time, see Pre-

selecting switch-on

times 103

"Set tyre pressure" 89

Shifting gears

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 59

– manual gearbox 57

Shiftlock

– automatic gearbox, seeChanging selector lever

positions 58

Short commands for the voice

input system 231

Shortest route in navigation,

see Selecting route 144

"Short route" in

navigation 145

"Show / Hide info types" 154

"Show destination

position" 139

"Show vehicle position" 139

Side airbags 90

Side lights 92

Side lights/low-beam

headlights 92

– bulb changing 208Side window blinds, see Roller

sunblinds 108

Side windows, see

Windows 36

Signal horn, see Horn 8, 9

Ski bag 115

Sliding/tilt sunroof 

– see Panorama glass roof 38

Slot for remote control 55

Smokers' package, see

Ashtray 110Snap-in adapter, see Centre

armrest storage

compartment 109

Snow chains 197

Socket, on-board diagnosis

OBD 203

Socket, see Connecting

electrical appliances 111

Song search, see Sampling

tracks 178

Soot particle filter, see Diesel

particle filter 120

SOS, see Making an

emergency call 213

Spare fuses 212

Special oils, see Approved

engine oils 201

Speed

– run-flat tyres 89

– when towing a trailer 126

– with winter tyres 197"Speed dependent volume",

see Tone settings 164

Speed-dependent volume

control 164

Speed limit 82

Speedometer 10

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 252: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 252/258

  F  r  o  m  A  t  o  Z

250

Split rear-seat backrests, see

Expanding the luggage

area 113

Sport program

– automatic gearbox with

Steptronic 59

Spray nozzles, see Cleaning

windscreen and

headlights 61Stability control, see Driving

stability control systems 85

Start/stop button 55

– starting the engine 56

– switching off the engine 56

"Start guidance" 136

Starting difficulties

– jump-starting 214

Starting on uphill gradients,

see Drive-off assistant 88

Starting the engine– start/stop button 55

Starting with a flat battery, see

Jump-starting 214

Start menu 15

Station

– see Radio 166

– see TV 187

"Status" 76

Status at time of printing 5

Status information on the

control display 18

Steering wheel 48

– adjustment 48

– buttons on steering wheel 9

– freely programmable

buttons 48

– interlock, see Electric

steering-wheel lock 48

– lock 55

– lock, see Electric steering-

wheel lock 48– locking with convenient

access 34

– programmable buttons 48

"Steering wheel buttons" 49

Steering with variable gear

ratio, see Active steering 90

Steptronic, see Automatic

gearbox with Steptronic 57

Stopping

– car 56

– engine 56

"Stopwatch" 82

Stopwatch 82

Storage compartments 109

Storing tyres 197

Stowage, see Storage

compartments 109Stowage nets 114

"Street" in destination

input 135

Summer tyres, see Wheels

and tyres 195

Sun roof, see Glass roof,

electric 37

Supply reservoir, see Washer

fluid reservoir 62

"Surround Settings", see

Tone settings 165Switches, see Cockpit 8

Switch for front passenger

airbags 50

Switching audio output for

entertainment systems on/

off 163

Switching off the engine

– start/stop button 55

Switching on

– audio 162

– CD changer 162

– CD player 162

– radio 162

– TV 187

Switching on hour signal 79

"Switch-on times" 103

Swivel-mounted trailer tow

hitch, see Trailer tow hitch

with swivel-mounted ball

head 124

SW waveband 166Symbols 4

– navigation system 155

– navigation system traffic

information 153

T

"T" 18

Tailgate 31

– convenient access 35

– emergency operation, see

Opening manually 31

– opening from outside 31

– opening manually 31

– remote control 28

Tailgate, see Luggage

compartment lid/tailgate 31Tail light, see Rear lights 208

– bulb changing 209, 210

Tank capacity, see Filling

capacities 230

Technical data 220

Technical modifications, see

For your own safety 5

Telephone

– installed position, see

Centre armrest 109

– see separate OperatingInstructions

"Telephone list" 49

TeleService, see separate

Operating Instructions 18

Television, see TV 187

Temperature

– automatic air-conditioning

system 99

– changing unit of measure 75

– coolant, see Coolant

temperature 71

Temperature display

– outside temperature 70

– outside temperature

warning 70

– setting units of measure 75

Tempomat, see Cruise

control 62, 63

Tensioning straps, see

Securing the load 123

"Text language" 83"Theatre", tone settings 165

Theft protection

– for wheel studs, see Thief-

proof wheel studs 211

Thief-proof wheel studs 211

Third brake light, see Centre

brake light 211

Through-loading system 111

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 253: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 253/258

 251

Through-loading system, see

Expanding the luggage

area 113

"TI+" 18

Tilt alarm sensor 34

"Time format" 79

Timekeeping, see

Stopwatch 82

Timer, see Pre-selectingswitch-on times 103

"Timer 1" for independent

heating/ventilation

system 103

"Timer 2" for independent

heating/ventilation

system 103

"TMC" 18

TMC stations, see Traffic

information 153

"Tone" 164, 165"Tone", see Tone

settings 164

Tone for audio mode

– centre setting 165

– settings 163

Toolkit 205

Torch, see Rechargeable

hand lamp 109

Towbar 216

Towing a trailer 124

Towing away 215

– cars with automatic

gearbox 215

– methods 216

Towing eyes 215

– screw thread 216

Towing eyes for tow-starting

and towing away 215

Town/city for destination

input 133

Towrope 217Tow-starting 215, 217

"TP" 18, 170

"TP AUTO" 170

TP Traffic Programme 169

Track

– sampling, scan 178

Tracks

– random play 179

– searching for 178

Track width, see

Dimensions 220

Traction aid, see Dynamic

Stability Control DSC 86

Traffic info plus 18

Traffic information fornavigation

– calling up 154

– during route guidance 156

– filtering 154

– representation in the route

map 156

– selecting stations 153

– switching on/off 153

– symbols 155

"Traffic information

settings" 153Traffic reports 169

– switching on/off 170

– TMC stations 153

– Traffic Programme 169

– volume 163

Trailer pulling, see Towing a

trailer 124

Trailer Stability Control 126

Trailer tow hitch 124

Trailer towing

– towing loads and gross

weight 226

Transmitter, see Remote

control for independent

heating/ventilation

system 104

Transporting children 50

Transport securing

equipment, see Securing

the load 123

Trap protection– glass roof, electric 37

– panorama glass roof 39

– windows 36

Tread depth, see Minimum

tread depth 195

Treble, see Tone settings 164

Trip distance recorder 70

Triple turn signal 60

"Triple turn signal

activation" 60

Turn indicators

– triple turn signal 60

Turning circle, see

Dimensions 220

Turn signals

– indicator/warning light 10

"TV" 163TV 187

– changing the channel 187

– changing the standard 188

– controls 162

– picture settings 188

– receivable channels 188

– switching on/off 162

– tone settings 163

– volume 162

Two-stage brake lights 90

Tyre changing, seeNew wheels and tyres 196

Tyre pressure

– loss 89

Tyre pressure monitoring, see

Run Flat Indicator 88

Tyre pressures 125, 195

Tyre puncture, see Run Flat

Indicator 89

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 254: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 254/258

Page 255: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 255/258

 253

Windows 36

– convenient operation 28

– opening, closing 36

– rear window 32

– safety switch 37

– trap protection 36

Windows, displays on the

control display 14

Windscreen– cleaning 61

Windscreen, infrared

reflecting, see Climatic

comfort windscreen 121

Windscreen wiper blades,

changing 205

Windscreen wipers, blades,

care, see booklet Looking

after your car

Winter-grade diesel 193

Winter tyres 197– speed limit 82

– tyre storage 197

Wiper blades, renewing 205

Wiper system 60

Wooden trim, see booklet

Looking after your car

Wordmatch principle for

navigation 145

Work in the engine

compartment 198

Wrench/screwdriver, see

Toolkit 205

X

xDrive 87

Xenon headlights 94

– automatic headlight beam

throw adjustment 94

– bulb changing 206

– driving on left/right 122

Y

Your individual vehicle 5

– settings, see Personal

Profile 26

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 256: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 256/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 257: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 257/258

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 013 270 - © 02/07 BMW AG

Page 258: BMW Manual for E90

8/12/2019 BMW Manual for E90

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bmw-manual-for-e90 258/258

The UltimateDriving Machine

More about BMW

www.bmw.com